all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 4.99 MiB | ||||
various |
|
Users Manual (Eng) rev2 | Users Manual | 5.32 MiB | / April 06 2018 | |||
various |
|
C2PC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 28.67 KiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various |
|
Certification Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 198.44 KiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various |
|
RF Exp EME PC2 1 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 1.39 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various |
|
RF Exp EME PC2 2 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 3.41 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various |
|
RF Exp PC2 App B probe cal pt 1 of 3 | RF Exposure Info | 3.80 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various |
|
RF Exp PC2 App B probe cal pt 2 of 3 | RF Exposure Info | 4.04 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various |
|
RF Exp PC2 App B probe cal pt 3 of 3 | RF Exposure Info | 4.08 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various |
|
RF Exp PC2 App C Dipole cal pt 1 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 4.81 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various |
|
RF Exp PC2 App C Dipole cal pt 2 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 2.66 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 | |||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | May 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | May 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | May 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Attestation Statements | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Attestation Statements | February 07 2018 / April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Attestation Statements | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Attestation Statements | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 2.76 MiB | April 06 2018 | |||
various |
|
Internal Photos Part 1 | Internal Photos | 3.64 MiB | April 06 2018 | |||
various |
|
Internal Photos Part 2 | Internal Photos | 3.51 MiB | April 06 2018 | |||
various | ID Label/Location Info | February 07 2018 / April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | March 07 2018 / April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | March 07 2018 / April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 06 2018 |
various | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.99 MiB |
Release 1.0 LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device User Guide JULY 2018 2018 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved MN005019A01-B MN005019A01-B Copyrights Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2018 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 2 MN005019A01-B Contact Us Contact Us Motorola Solutions Support Center The Solutions Support Center (SSC) is the primary contact for technical support included in your organization's service agreement with Motorola Solutions. Service agreement customers should be sure to call the SSC in all situations listed under Customer Responsibilities in their agreement, such as:
Before reloading software. To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before taking action. Your organization received support phone numbers and other contact information appropriate for your geographic region and service agreement. Use that contact information for the most efficient response. However, if needed, you can also find general support contact information on the Motorola Solutions website, by following these steps:
Enter motorolasolutions.com in your browser Ensure that your organization's country or region is displayed on the page. Clicking or tapping the name of the region provides a way to change it. Select "Support" on the motorolasolutions.com page. Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:
The document title and part number The page number or title of the section with the error A description of the error 3 MN005019A01-B Document History Document History Date May 2018 July 2018 Description Original release of the LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device User Guide Second release of the LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device User Guide The following sections were updated:
Regulatory Information on page 21 Accessories on page 105 Enabling Hearing Aid Compatibility on page 55 Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Ra-
Important Safety Information on page 20 dio for PTT Communications on page 72 Technical Specifications on page 118 Version MN005019A01-A MN005019A01-B 4 MN005019A01-B Contents Contents Copyrights................................................................................................................... 2 Contact Us................................................................................................................... 3 Document History....................................................................................................... 4 List of Figures............................................................................................................11 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 12 List of Processes...................................................................................................... 13 List of Procedures.....................................................................................................14 About This Manual.................................................................................................... 18 What is Covered in This Manual..................................................................................................18 Helpful Background Information.................................................................................................. 18 Related Information..................................................................................................................... 18 Important Safety Information....................................................................................................... 20 Service Information......................................................................................................................20 Regulatory Information................................................................................................................ 21 Versions.......................................................................................................................................23 Notational Conventions................................................................................................................23 Icon Conventions.........................................................................................................................23 Chapter 1: Getting Started........................................................................................24 1.1 Device Overview....................................................................................................................24 1.2 Package Contents................................................................................................................. 26 1.3 Setting Up the Device............................................................................................................ 27 1.3.1 Dual SIM Functionality............................................................................................. 27 1.3.2 Inserting SIM Cards................................................................................................. 27 1.3.2.1 Removing SIM Cards................................................................................. 28 1.3.3 Installing a MicroSD Card........................................................................................ 28 1.3.3.1 Removing a MicroSD Card........................................................................ 29 1.3.4 Installing the Battery................................................................................................ 29 1.3.4.1 Removing the Battery.................................................................................29 1.3.5 Attaching Battery Cover........................................................................................... 30 1.3.5.1 Removing the Battery Cover...................................................................... 30 1.3.6 Charging Information............................................................................................... 30 1.3.6.1 Battery Charge Indicators.......................................................................... 31 1.3.6.2 Turning On Battery Saving Mode...............................................................32 1.4 Powering On the Device for the First Time............................................................................32 1.5 Powering On..........................................................................................................................34 5 MN005019A01-B Contents 1.6 Powering Off..........................................................................................................................34 1.7 Battery Management............................................................................................................. 34 1.7.1 Battery Usage Monitor............................................................................................. 34 1.7.2 Low Battery Notification........................................................................................... 35 1.7.3 Battery Optimization.................................................................................................35 1.7.3.1 Entering Airplane Mode..............................................................................36 Chapter 2: Basic Functions......................................................................................37 2.1 Home Screen.........................................................................................................................37 2.2 Touchscreen Navigation........................................................................................................38 2.3 On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................................................................39 2.3.1 Google Keyboard Settings....................................................................................... 39 2.3.2 Google Voice Typing................................................................................................40 2.3.2.1 Adjusting Google Voice Typing Settings.................................................... 40 2.4 Status Bar Icons.................................................................................................................... 41 2.5 Switching to Multiple Active Windows View...........................................................................41 2.6 Accessing Files from a Computer..........................................................................................42 Chapter 3: Device Settings.......................................................................................43 3.1 Covert Mode.......................................................................................................................... 43 3.1.1 Turning On Covert Mode......................................................................................... 43 3.1.2 Turning Off Covert Mode......................................................................................... 44 3.1.3 Configuring Covert Mode......................................................................................... 44 3.2 Setting Programmable Buttons..............................................................................................44 3.3 LEX Series Screen Lock........................................................................................................45 3.3.1 Selecting a Locking Option...................................................................................... 45 3.3.2 Setting Timeout for Locking..................................................................................... 47 3.3.3 Device Unlock.......................................................................................................... 47 3.3.3.1 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern................................................47 3.3.3.2 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password................................ 47 3.3.3.3 Setting Unlock with Fingerprint.................................................................. 48 3.3.4 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device....................................................... 49 3.4 Setting Date and Time...........................................................................................................50 3.5 Setting the Display.................................................................................................................50 3.5.1 Setting Screen Brightness Level..............................................................................50 3.5.2 Setting Adaptive Brightness.....................................................................................51 3.5.3 Changing Wallpapers...............................................................................................51 3.5.4 Setting Up Sleep Mode............................................................................................ 51 3.5.5 Setting Up Screen Saver......................................................................................... 51 3.5.6 Setting Font Size......................................................................................................51 3.5.7 Setting Display Size................................................................................................. 52 6 MN005019A01-B Contents 3.5.8 Setting Screen Rotation........................................................................................... 52 3.5.9 Enabling Cast Screen.............................................................................................. 52 3.6 Sound Settings...................................................................................................................... 52 3.6.1 Adjusting Sound Settings.........................................................................................52 3.6.2 Enabling Howling Suppression................................................................................ 53 3.6.2.1 Disabling Howling Suppression..................................................................53 3.6.3 Setting Up Do Not Disturb........................................................................................54 3.6.3.1 Setting Automatic Rules.............................................................................54 3.6.4 Enabling Hearing Aid Compatibility..........................................................................55 3.6.4.1 Disabling Hearing Aid Compatibility........................................................... 56 Chapter 4: Wireless...................................................................................................57 4.1 Bluetooth Profiles...................................................................................................................57 4.2 Bluetooth Power States......................................................................................................... 58 4.3 Enabling Bluetooth.................................................................................................................58 4.4 Disabling Bluetooth................................................................................................................59 4.5 Renaming the Device............................................................................................................ 59 4.6 Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices...................................................................................... 59 4.6.1 Managing Bluetooth Devices................................................................................... 59 4.7 Connecting to Wi-Fi Networks............................................................................................... 60 Adding New Networks.......................................................................................................60 Editing Networks............................................................................................................... 60 Forgetting Networks..........................................................................................................60 4.8 Configuring Wi-Fi Hotspots....................................................................................................61 4.9 Setting Up USB Tethering..................................................................................................... 62 4.10 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering..........................................................................................62 4.11 Near-Field Communication.................................................................................................. 62 4.11.1 Turning NFC On.....................................................................................................63 4.11.2 Turning NFC Off.....................................................................................................63 Chapter 5: Contacts.................................................................................................. 64 5.1 Adding New Contacts............................................................................................................ 64 5.2 Editing Contact Details.......................................................................................................... 64 5.3 Searching Contacts............................................................................................................... 64 5.4 Sharing Contacts................................................................................................................... 65 Chapter 6: Calling......................................................................................................66 6.1 Making Calls.......................................................................................................................... 66 6.1.1 Setting Up Speed Dial..............................................................................................67 6.2 Making Conference Calls.......................................................................................................67 6.3 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset............................................................................ 68 6.4 Call Settings...........................................................................................................................69 7 MN005019A01-B Contents Chapter 7: Messaging...............................................................................................70 7.1 Sending Messages................................................................................................................ 70 Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios............................................................ 72 8.1 Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Radio for PTT Communications...................... 72 8.2 Pairing Radio with the LEX Device ....................................................................................... 74 8.3 Unpairing Radio from the LEX Device................................................................................... 75 8.4 Selecting Zones and Channels..............................................................................................75 8.5 Adding Favorite Talkgroups...................................................................................................76 8.6 Selecting Talkgroups............................................................................................................. 77 8.7 Sending PTT Audio................................................................................................................77 8.8 Selecting Audio Routing Options........................................................................................... 77 8.8.1 Adjusting Sound Volume..........................................................................................78 8.9 Emergency Mode on LEX Device Paired with LMR.............................................................. 79 Chapter 9: Emergency Services.............................................................................. 80 9.1 Emergency Mode Alert Settings............................................................................................ 80 9.1.1 Enabling Emergency Mode......................................................................................80 9.2 Emergency Calls....................................................................................................................80 9.2.1 Making Emergency Calls......................................................................................... 81 9.3 Configuring Emergency Broadcast Alert Settings..................................................................81 Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE.............................................................................................82 10.1 Making IMS VoLTE Calls.....................................................................................................82 10.2 Making IMS Video Calls.......................................................................................................83 10.2.1 Receiving IMS Video Calls.....................................................................................84 10.2.2 Enabling IMS Video Calling .................................................................................. 85 10.3 Making IMS Multi-Party Conference Calls........................................................................... 86 10.4 IMS Voicemail......................................................................................................................87 10.4.1 Enabling IMS VoiceMail Notification Sounds ........................................................ 87 10.5 IMS Supplementary Services.............................................................................................. 88 10.5.1 Placing IMS VoLTE Call on Hold .......................................................................... 88 10.5.2 Enabling IMS Call Waiting..................................................................................... 89 10.5.3 Enabling IMS Call Forwarding............................................................................... 89 10.5.4 Enabling IMS Call Barring......................................................................................90 10.5.5 Enabling and Disabling Caller ID in an IMS System.............................................. 90 10.6 IMS Messaging.................................................................................................................... 91 10.6.1 Enabling IMS Group Messaging ........................................................................... 91 Chapter 11: Applications..........................................................................................93 11.1 Applications......................................................................................................................... 93 11.2 Camera................................................................................................................................95 11.2.1 Taking Photos........................................................................................................ 95 8 MN005019A01-B Contents 11.2.2 Recording Videos...................................................................................................96 11.3 Gallery................................................................................................................................. 97 11.3.1 Albums................................................................................................................... 97 11.3.1.1 Sharing Albums........................................................................................97 11.3.1.2 Checking Album Information.................................................................... 97 11.3.1.3 Deleting Albums....................................................................................... 98 11.3.2 Photos....................................................................................................................98 11.3.2.1 Viewing and Browsing Photos..................................................................98 11.3.2.2 Rotating Photos........................................................................................98 11.3.2.3 Cropping Photos...................................................................................... 99 11.3.2.4 Setting Photos as Contact Icons.............................................................. 99 11.3.2.5 Sharing Photos.......................................................................................100 11.3.2.6 Deleting Photos......................................................................................100 11.3.3 Videos..................................................................................................................100 11.3.3.1 Watching Videos.................................................................................... 100 11.3.3.2 Sharing Videos.......................................................................................101 11.3.3.3 Deleting Videos...................................................................................... 101 11.4 Turning On the Flashlight.................................................................................................. 102 11.5 Taking Screen Captures.................................................................................................... 102 11.6 Managing Downloads........................................................................................................ 102 11.7 Exploring Files................................................................................................................... 103 11.8 Public Safety Experience (PSX) Applications....................................................................103 Chapter 12: Accessories........................................................................................ 105 12.1 Accessories....................................................................................................................... 105 Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting...................................................107 13.1 Installing Firmware Updates.............................................................................................. 107 13.2 Maintaining LEX Device ....................................................................................................107 13.3 Battery Safety Guidelines.................................................................................................. 108 13.4 Cleaning Guidelines...........................................................................................................108 13.5 Cleaning LEX Device.........................................................................................................109 13.6 Cleaning Interface Connector............................................................................................110 13.7 Cleaning Battery Contacts................................................................................................. 110 13.8 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................110 13.9 Backing up Contacts with Android..................................................................................... 114 13.10 Backing Up LEX Data Manually.......................................................................................115 13.11 Syncing Data with Google............................................................................................... 115 13.12 Backing Up Your Data and Settings with Android Backup Service................................. 115 13.13 Restoring Contact Data................................................................................................... 116 13.14 Restoring Your Data and Settings................................................................................... 116 9 MN005019A01-B Contents 13.15 Resetting the LEX Device................................................................................................117 Appendix A: Technical Specifications.................................................................. 118 10 MN005019A01-B List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1: LEX L11 Overview...................................................................................................................24 Figure 2: LEX L11 Top........................................................................................................................... 25 Figure 3: LEX L11 Side Buttons Overview............................................................................................. 26 Figure 4: LEX L11 SIM Card Tray.......................................................................................................... 27 Figure 5: MicroSD Card Insertion........................................................................................................... 28 Figure 6: Battery Cover Removal Slot.................................................................................................... 30 Figure 7: LEX L11 Welcome Screen...................................................................................................... 33 Figure 8: Battery Screen.........................................................................................................................35 Figure 9: LEX L11 Home Screen Overview............................................................................................37 Figure 10: Notifications Panel.................................................................................................................42 Figure 11: Set up WLAN Hotspot Dialog Box.........................................................................................61 Figure 12: PSX Cockpit Sidebar Menu...................................................................................................73 Figure 13: Push to Talk Screen..............................................................................................................73 Figure 14: Secure Pairing Screen.......................................................................................................... 74 Figure 15: Radio Services Overflow Menu............................................................................................. 75 Figure 16: Channel Selection Screen.....................................................................................................76 Figure 17: Navigation in the Channel Selection Screen.........................................................................76 Figure 18: Radio Volume Slidebar..........................................................................................................79 Figure 19: Receiving Video Call............................................................................................................. 85 Figure 20: Mode Selection Bar...............................................................................................................95 Figure 21: Mode Selection Bar...............................................................................................................96 Figure 22: Mode Selection Bar...............................................................................................................96 Figure 23: Video Playback Controls..................................................................................................... 101 11 MN005019A01-B List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: Motorola Documentation.......................................................................................................... 19 Table 2: Motorola Solutions Accessories and Energy Documentation...................................................20 Table 3: LEX L11 Back and Front.......................................................................................................... 24 Table 4: LEX L11 Top.............................................................................................................................25 Table 5: LEX L11 Side Buttons.............................................................................................................. 26 Table 6: LEX L11 Notification LEDs....................................................................................................... 31 Table 7: LEX L11 Home Screen.............................................................................................................37 Table 8: On-Screen Navigation Buttons.................................................................................................38 Table 9: Touchscreen Actions................................................................................................................38 Table 10: Google Keyboard Settings......................................................................................................39 Table 11: Status Bar Icons..................................................................................................................... 41 Table 12: Bluetooth Profiles................................................................................................................... 57 Table 13: Message Media Type............................................................................................................. 70 Table 14: ASTRO (APX) Radios Supported by LEX L11....................................................................... 72 Table 15: TETRA Radios Supported by LEX L11.................................................................................. 72 Table 16: Calling Accounts Setting.........................................................................................................89 Table 17: LEX L11 Applications............................................................................................................. 93 Table 18: Carry Accessories................................................................................................................ 105 Table 19: Chargers (USB-C)................................................................................................................ 105 Table 20: Batteries............................................................................................................................... 106 Table 21: Troubleshooting the LEX Series Device...............................................................................110 Table 22: For LEX Devices with Dual SIMs (Private Network and Public Network).............................113 Table 23: Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................118 12 MN005019A01-B List of Processes List of Processes Setting Up the Device ............................................................................................................................27 13 MN005019A01-B List of Procedures List of Procedures Inserting SIM Cards ...............................................................................................................................27 Removing SIM Cards ............................................................................................................................ 28 Installing a MicroSD Card ......................................................................................................................28 Removing a MicroSD Card ....................................................................................................................29 Installing the Battery ..............................................................................................................................29 Removing the Battery ............................................................................................................................29 Attaching Battery Cover .........................................................................................................................30 Removing the Battery Cover ................................................................................................................. 30 Turning On Battery Saving Mode .......................................................................................................... 32 Powering On the Device for the First Time ............................................................................................32 Powering On ..........................................................................................................................................34 Powering Off ..........................................................................................................................................34 Entering Airplane Mode .........................................................................................................................36 Google Voice Typing ............................................................................................................................. 40 Adjusting Google Voice Typing Settings ............................................................................................... 40 Switching to Multiple Active Windows View ...........................................................................................41 Accessing Files from a Computer ..........................................................................................................42 Turning On Covert Mode .......................................................................................................................43 Turning Off Covert Mode .......................................................................................................................44 Configuring Covert Mode .......................................................................................................................44 Setting Programmable Buttons ..............................................................................................................44 Selecting a Locking Option ....................................................................................................................45 Setting Timeout for Locking ...................................................................................................................47 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern ........................................................................................... 47 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password ............................................................................47 Setting Unlock with Fingerprint ..............................................................................................................48 Unlocking the Device by Using the Fingerprint Sensor ......................................................................... 49 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device .....................................................................................49 Setting Date and Time ...........................................................................................................................50 Setting Screen Brightness Level ........................................................................................................... 50 Setting Adaptive Brightness .................................................................................................................. 51 Changing Wallpapers ............................................................................................................................ 51 Setting Up Sleep Mode ..........................................................................................................................51 Setting Up Screen Saver .......................................................................................................................51 Setting Font Size ................................................................................................................................... 51 Setting Display Size ...............................................................................................................................52 14 MN005019A01-B List of Procedures Setting Screen Rotation .........................................................................................................................52 Enabling Cast Screen ............................................................................................................................52 Adjusting Sound Settings ...................................................................................................................... 52 Enabling Howling Suppression ..............................................................................................................53 Disabling Howling Suppression .............................................................................................................53 Setting Up Do Not Disturb ..................................................................................................................... 54 Setting Automatic Rules ........................................................................................................................ 54 Enabling Hearing Aid Compatibility ....................................................................................................... 55 Disabling Hearing Aid Compatibility ...................................................................................................... 56 Enabling Bluetooth ................................................................................................................................ 58 Disabling Bluetooth ................................................................................................................................59 Renaming the Device ............................................................................................................................ 59 Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices ...................................................................................................... 59 Managing Bluetooth Devices .................................................................................................................59 Connecting to Wi-Fi Networks ............................................................................................................... 60 Adding New Networks ........................................................................................................................... 60 Editing Networks ....................................................................................................................................60 Forgetting Networks .............................................................................................................................. 60 Configuring Wi-Fi Hotspots ....................................................................................................................61 Setting Up USB Tethering ..................................................................................................................... 62 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering ............................................................................................................62 Turning NFC On .................................................................................................................................... 63 Turning NFC Off .................................................................................................................................... 63 Adding New Contacts ............................................................................................................................64 Editing Contact Details .......................................................................................................................... 64 Searching Contacts ............................................................................................................................... 64 Sharing Contacts ...................................................................................................................................65 Making Calls ..........................................................................................................................................66 Setting Up Speed Dial ........................................................................................................................... 67 Making Conference Calls ...................................................................................................................... 67 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset ............................................................................................68 Sending Messages ................................................................................................................................70 Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Radio for PTT Communications ...................................... 72 Pairing Radio with the LEX Device ........................................................................................................74 Unpairing Radio from the LEX Device ...................................................................................................75 Selecting Zones and Channels ..............................................................................................................75 Adding Favorite Talkgroups ...................................................................................................................76 Selecting Talkgroups .............................................................................................................................77 Sending PTT Audio ............................................................................................................................... 77 15 MN005019A01-B List of Procedures Selecting Audio Routing Options ...........................................................................................................77 Adjusting Sound Volume ....................................................................................................................... 78 Enabling Emergency Mode ................................................................................................................... 80 Making Emergency Calls .......................................................................................................................81 Configuring Emergency Broadcast Alert Settings ................................................................................. 81 Making IMS VoLTE Calls .......................................................................................................................82 Making IMS Video Calls ........................................................................................................................ 83 Receiving IMS Video Calls .................................................................................................................... 84 Enabling IMS Video Calling ...................................................................................................................85 Making IMS Multi-Party Conference Calls .............................................................................................86 Enabling IMS VoiceMail Notification Sounds .........................................................................................87 Placing IMS VoLTE Call on Hold ...........................................................................................................88 Enabling IMS Call Waiting .....................................................................................................................89 Enabling IMS Call Forwarding ...............................................................................................................89 Enabling IMS Call Barring ..................................................................................................................... 90 Enabling and Disabling Caller ID in an IMS System ..............................................................................90 IMS Messaging ......................................................................................................................................91 Enabling IMS Group Messaging ............................................................................................................91 Taking Photos ........................................................................................................................................95 Recording Videos .................................................................................................................................. 96 Sharing Albums ..................................................................................................................................... 97 Checking Album Information ................................................................................................................. 97 Deleting Albums .................................................................................................................................... 98 Viewing and Browsing Photos ...............................................................................................................98 Rotating Photos .....................................................................................................................................98 Cropping Photos ....................................................................................................................................99 Setting Photos as Contact Icons ........................................................................................................... 99 Sharing Photos ....................................................................................................................................100 Deleting Photos ................................................................................................................................... 100 Watching Videos ..................................................................................................................................100 Sharing Videos .................................................................................................................................... 101 Deleting Videos ................................................................................................................................... 101 Turning On the Flashlight .................................................................................................................... 102 Taking Screen Captures ......................................................................................................................102 Managing Downloads ..........................................................................................................................102 Exploring Files .....................................................................................................................................103 Installing Firmware Updates ................................................................................................................ 107 Cleaning Interface Connector ..............................................................................................................110 Cleaning Battery Contacts ...................................................................................................................110 16 MN005019A01-B List of Procedures Backing up Contacts with Android .......................................................................................................114 Backing Up LEX Data Manually .......................................................................................................... 115 Syncing Data with Google ................................................................................................................... 115 Backing Up Your Data and Settings with Android Backup Service ..................................................... 115 Restoring Contact Data ....................................................................................................................... 116 Restoring Your Data and Settings .......................................................................................................116 Resetting the LEX Device ....................................................................................................................117 17 MN005019A01-B About This Manual About This Manual This guide provides information about using the LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device, its basic Android features, and features added by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions features include a Radio Services application for collaboration with supported Land Mobile Radio (LMR) models, such as ASTRO 25 APX and TETRA MTP radios. Screens and menu options may be changed or customized by your agency to show different information. What is Covered in This Manual This manual contains the following chapters:
Getting Started on page 24 explains getting the LEX device up and running for the first time. Basic Functions on page 37 describes basic functions of the LEX device, such as touchscreen navigation, on-screen keyboard settings, and others. Device Settings on page 43 describes the settings available on the device. Wireless on page 57 explains configuring the device to operate in wireless networks. Contacts on page 64 covers the Contacts application. Calling on page 66 describes using the Phone application, for example making calls, conference calls, and others. Messaging on page 70 covers sending text and multimedia messages. Collaboration with LMR Radios on page 72 is a reference to connecting the LEX device to a Land Mobile Radio for communicating on LTE, TETRA, and ASTRO systems. Emergency Services on page 80 explains emergency functions of the device. IMS VoLTE on page 82 covers communication in the IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem
(IMS), if present in your phone's network. Applications on page 93 describes applications available for the LEX device. Accessories on page 105 provides information on accessories compatible with the LEX L11 device. Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 107 provides solutions to most common problems related to the LEX device. Technical Specifications on page 118 contains technical details of the LEX device. Helpful Background Information Motorola Solutions offers various courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For more information on current course offerings and technology paths, visit http://
www.motorolasolutions.com/training. Related Information It is recommended that you obtain access to the following documentation. Unless otherwise specified, the Motorola Solutions documents listed here are available to users with a login account at https://learning.motorolasolutions.com. You can search for LEX device manuals by entering LEX in the Search Catalog field. 18 MN005019A01-B About This Manual You can also access the manuals on the device by tapping LEX Docs You are redirected to the Motorola Solutions learning portal, where you can download the LEX manuals and view them. For information on warranty terms, see the Support page at https://www.motorolasolutions.com. For instructions on accessing the appropriate Support page for your region, see Contact Us on page 3. on the device home screen. Table 1: Motorola Documentation Related Information LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device Quick Start Guide RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mission Critical Devices LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device Service Provisioning and Management Guide WAVE 7000 PSX Push-to-Talk for Mobile Devi-
ces manual WAVE Mobile Communicator PTT User Guide Tutorial for Motorola Solutions carrier-based Push-To-Talk app, such as Enhanced Push-To-
Talk for Android from AT&T. PSX User Guide PSX Secure Calling User Guide Purpose Provides initial tasks for the physical setup of the LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device, in-
cluding SIM card and battery installation, and charging using the USB-C cable. NOTICE: For information about charger accessories available from Motorola Solutions, contact your de-
vice technician or device administra-
tor. Describes how to safely use mission critical de-
vices. Provides field technician with instructions for ac-
tivating LEX L11 devices on the broadband net-
work with the configuration required by their users and organization. Describes how to use the PTT application that offers services over 4G, 3G, or WiFi network. Provides instructions for installing, configuring, and operating the WAVE Mobile Communicator on Android and iOS devices, for use in a WAVE 5000 Management Server domain or www.waveoncloud.com. Browser-based tutorial is accessible from the user interface of the Android PTT application, under Settings. For additional information, con-
tact your service provider. This manual provides basic operation proce-
dures for PSX mobile application suite (dedicat-
ed chapters for Cockpit, Mapping, and Messen-
ger), including necessary operator and system context. Provides information about the Private Teleph-
ony Solution PSX Secure Calling client for Voice Over IP (VoIP) services available from Motorola Solutions for its Public Safety LTE systems. 19 MN005019A01-B About This Manual Table 2: Motorola Solutions Accessories and Energy Documentation Document MN004688A01 LEX L11 Holster User Manual MN004687A01 LEX L11 Cradle Quick Start Guide MN003440A01 LEX L11 Multi Unit Charger User Manual MN003922A01 LEX L11 Multi Unit Charger Safety Leaflet MN004263A01 LEX L11 IMPRES 2 Adaptive Unit Charger User Guide MN004594A01 LEX L11 IMPRES 2 Dual Or Single Unit Chargers Safety Leaflet Purpose A user guide that describes how to use the hol-
ster. A quick start guide that describes how to start using the LEX L11 cradle in no time. A user guide that describes how to use the Mul-
ti-Unit Charger. A safety information leaflet that describes LEX L11 Charger Kits. A user manual that describes how to use the IMPRES 2 Adaptive Unit Charger. A safety leaflet that describes the IMPRES 2 Dual Or Single Unit Chargers. Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mission Critical Devices. NOTICE:
ATTENTION! This mission critical device is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the mission critical device, read the RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mission Critical Devices manual which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. This equipment is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. For body worn operation, this device has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guideline for use with a Motorola Solutions, Inc. approved accessories sold with this device. Use of non-Motorola-approved body worn or battery accessories may exceed the applicable RF exposure guidelines (iEEE, ICNIRP or FCC). Service Information If you have a problem with your device, you can contact Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center for your region. Contact information is available at: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/support. You can also call 1-800-323-9949 for support and select option 6 for PS LTE infrastructure and devices. When contacting support, have the following information available:
Serial number of the unit (found on manufacturing label) Model number or product name (found on manufacturing label) Software type and version number If returning the device to Motorola Solutions for repair service, please ensure the following items have been completed prior to shipping the device:
Perform complete backup of device, including personal data and contact information Remove SIM card(s) from device If applicable, remove SD memory card from device If applicable, remove CRYPTR micro SD card from device 20 MN005019A01-B About This Manual Erase/wipe all personal and/or confidential data from device Please return the damaged device, only. Accessories, such as the battery, battery cover, charging cable, holster, etc., should NOT be included with the device when it is returned. Regulatory Information LEX L11 regulatory labels are located at Settings About phone Regulatory labels. NOTICE: If you cannot access regulatory labels in Settings, you can locate physical regulatory labels in the LEX L11 battery compartment. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following three conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (3) Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions may void the user's authority to operate this device. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and complies with Canadian ICES-003. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For Canada: Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. This device meets all the other requirements specified in Part 15E, Section 15.407 of the FCC Rules. Wireless Device Country Approvals Regulatory markings, subject to certification, are applied to the device signifying that the radio(s) is/are approved for use in the US. Operation of the device without regulatory approval is illegal. FOR COUNTRY CODE SELECTION USAGE (WLAN DEVICES) NOTICE: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. 21 MN005019A01-B About This Manual Industry Canada WLAN statement CAUTION:
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit;
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-
to-point operation as appropriate; and
(iv) the worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.2(3) shall be clearly indicated.
(v) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Use with Hearing Aids This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone. To determine the compatibility of a WD and a particular hearing aid, simply add the numerical part of the hearing aid category (e.g. M2/T2=2) with the numerical part of the WD emission rating (e.g., M3=3) to arrive at the system classification for this particular combination of WD and hearing aid. A sum of 5 would indicate that the WD and hearing aid would provide normal use, and a sum of 6 or greater would indicate that the WD and hearing aid would provide excellent performance. A category sum of less than 4 would likely result in a performance that is judged unacceptable by the hearing aid user. WHAT IS HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY?
The Federal Communications Commission has implemented rules and a rating system designed to enable people who wear hearing aids to more effectively use these wireless telecommunications devices. The standard for compatibility of digital wireless phones with hearing aids is set forth in American National Standard Institute (ANSI) standard C63.19. There are two sets of ANSI standards with ratings from one to four (four being the best rating): an M rating for reduced interference making it easier to hear conversations on the phone when using the hearing aid microphone, and a T rating that enables the phone to be used with hearing aids operating in the telecoil mode thus reducing unwanted background noise. HOW WILL I KNOW WHICH WIRELESS PHONES ARE HEARING AID COMPATIBLE?
The Hearing Aid Compatibility rating is displayed on the wireless phone box. A phone is considered Hearing Aid Compatible for acoustic coupling (microphone mode) if it has an M3 or M4 rating. A digital wireless phone is considered Hearing Aid Compatible for inductive coupling (telecoil mode) if it has a T3 or T4 rating. The tested M-Rating and T-Rating for this device (FCC/IC ID: AZ489FT7104/109U-89FT7104) are M4 and T3. HOW WILL I KNOW IF MY HEARING AID WILL WORK WITH A PARTICULAR DIGITAL WIRELESS PHONE?
Youll want to try a number of wireless phones so that you can decide which works the best with your hearing aids. You may also want to talk with your hearing aid professional about the extent to which 22 MN005019A01-B About This Manual your hearing aids are immune to interference, if they have wireless phone shielding, and whether your hearing aid has a HAC rating. Versions This guide covers various software configurations and references made to operating system or software versions. For the operating system version, software build number, and the kernel version you can go to Settings About phone Phone status. Icons on a screen Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document:
Italics are used to highlight the following:
Chapters and sections in this and related documents Bold text is used to highlight the following:
Dialog box, window, and screen names Drop-down list and list box names Check box and radio button names Key names on a keypad Button names on a screen Bullets () indicate:
Action items Lists of alternatives Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential Sequential lists (for example, those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists. Icon Conventions The documentation set is designed to give the reader more visual clues. The following graphic icons are used throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are described here. WARNING: The word WARNING with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, could result in death or serious injury, or serious product damage. CAUTION: The word CAUTION with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, may result in minor or moderate injury, or serious product damage. NOTICE: NOTICE contains information more important than the surrounding text, such as exceptions or preconditions. They also refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader how to complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the reader where something is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a note. 23 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started Chapter 1 Getting Started In this chapter, you can learn about the features of the LEX L11 device, and how to set up the device before the first power up. 1.1 Device Overview This topic provides an overview of the LEX L11 device. Figure 1: LEX L11 Overview Table 3: LEX L11 Back and Front Item Front camera Earpiece speaker Front microphone #1 Audio Jack SIM card tray Display Loudspeaker USB port Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 24 12345678912101311 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started Number 9 10 11 12 13 Item Front microphone #2 Rear camera and flash Fingerprint sensor Battery cover Rear microphone Figure 2: LEX L11 Top Table 4: LEX L11 Top Number 1 Item Emergency button 2 3 Talkgroup rocker LED Description Upon a long press, the Emergency button initiates Public Safety Emergency operation when the Public Safety applications are installed. NOTICE: For more information on the PSX Cockpit Emergency button, see PSX User Guide. The talkgroup rocker changes talkgroups when used with a Mo-
torola Solutions application that supports it. LED light is a notification light that serves to communicate infor-
mation even when the LEX screen is off. For more information on LED notifications, see Battery Charge Indicators on page 31. 25 132 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started Figure 3: LEX L11 Side Buttons Overview Table 5: LEX L11 Side Buttons Number 1 Button Power button 2 3 4 5 PTT button Volume Up and Volume Down buttons Programmable Button 1 Programmable Button 2 Function A long press of the Power button turns on the device. When the device is on, a long press of the power button displays the Power button menu. A short press toggles the display on and off. When continuously pressed, enables transmission of Push-to-Talk
(PTT) calls in all device modes: active, locked, and/or suspended, when used with a PTT application designed to support it. Controls the audio volume. A short press or a long press of each of the buttons can generate events. Programmable buttons are pre-programmed with default settings, which can generate events even before provisioning. 1.2 Package Contents The LEX L11 package contains the following items:
The LEX L11 device Standard battery/high capacity battery with the appropriate battery cover USB-A to USB-C data/power cable Region-specific wall charger LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device Quick Start Guide RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mission Critical Devices 26 14523 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.3 Setting Up the Device Process:
1 Remove the screen protection film from the device. 2 Install the SIM card(s). See Inserting SIM Cards on page 27. 3 Optional: Install the microSD or CRYPTR card. See Installing a MicroSD Card on page 28. 4 Install the battery. See Installing the Battery on page 29. 5 Attach the battery cover. See Attaching Battery Cover on page 30. 6 Charge the device. See Charging Information on page 30. 1.3.1 Dual SIM Functionality Your LEX device can operate in two different networks. The dual SIM functionality allows you to use two SIM cards in your LEX device. Each SIM card is issued by a different carrier or provider. Whenever you want to switch between the two networks, you can go to Settings SIM cards, and select a radio button next to the SIM slot of your choice. NOTICE: When only a single SIM card is present in the SIM card tray, that SIM card is automatically chosen. 1.3.2 Inserting SIM Cards You can insert one or two Nano SIM cards into the SIM tray. Procedure:
1 By using your fingernail, pull out the Nano SIM card side tray. The Nano SIM card side tray is located on the side of the LEX L11 device, under the audio port. 2 With the phone display facing down, insert the Nano SIM card in the SIM card tray. Figure 4: LEX L11 SIM Card Tray 3 Push the SIM card into the tray until it is fully seated and flat. 4 Insert the Nano SIM card tray back into the device. 27 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.3.2.1 Removing SIM Cards You can follow these steps to remove the Nano SIM cards from the Nano SIM card holder. Procedure:
1 By using your fingernail, pull out the Nano SIM card side tray. The Nano SIM card side tray is located on the side of the LEX L11 device, under the audio port. 2 Remove the Nano SIM card from the SIM card tray. 3 Insert the Nano SIM card tray back into the device. 1.3.3 Installing a MicroSD Card You can follow this procedure to install a microSD card (for example, a memory card, or a CRYPTR micro encryption card) in your device. The following figure describes how to insert a microSD card in your LEX device:
Figure 5: MicroSD Card Insertion Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button. 2 Tap Power Off. Tap OK. 3 Remove the battery cover. See Removing the Battery Cover on page 30. 4 Remove the battery. See Removing the Battery on page 29. 5 Remove the microSD card plug by using your fingernail. 6 If a dummy microSD card is inserted in the microSD plug, remove it and replace it with your microSD card. 7 Insert the microSD card by performing the following actions:
a Insert the microSD card into the microSD plug (1). The angle of insertion should be 45 degrees. The rib of the microSD card must be at the bottom for insertion. b Push the microSD card down and ensure that it is fully seated (2). c When the microSD card is fully seated and flat (3), slide the card with the plug into the card holder slot with contacts facing up. 8 Push the card into the slot until it is fully seated and locked into place. 28 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 9 Insert the battery. See Installing the Battery on page 29. 10 Place the battery cover on the back of the device. 1.3.3.1 Removing a MicroSD Card Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button. 2 Tap Power Off. Tap OK. 3 Remove the battery cover. See Removing the Battery Cover on page 30. 4 Remove the battery. See Removing the Battery on page 29. 5 Remove the microSD card plug by using your nail. 6 Remove the microSD card from the card plug. 7 Reattach the card plug to the card holder slot. 8 Insert the battery. See Installing the Battery on page 29. 9 Place the battery cover on the back of the device. See Attaching Battery Cover on page 30. 1.3.4 Installing the Battery CAUTION: If the device has been submerged, and the battery has been removed, you must allow the battery compartment to dry completely before re-inserting the battery. Failure to do so will result in damage to the device. Procedure:
1 If you are performing initial setup of the device, remove the battery from the packaging. 2 If the battery cover is on, gently remove it from the device. See Removing the Battery Cover on page 30. 3 Make sure the slider on the back of the device is on the unlock position (away from the battery). 4 Insert the battery into the battery compartment, first attaching the top of the battery, where the connector is located. 5 Press the top of the battery in place. 6 Lock the slider by shifting it up. 7 Attach the battery cover. See Attaching Battery Cover on page 30. 1.3.4.1 Removing the Battery Procedure:
1 Gently remove the battery cover. See Removing the Battery Cover on page 30. 2 Make sure the slider on the back of the device is on the unlock position (away from the battery). 3 With the tips of your thumb and index finger, remove the battery by lifting the tab at the bottom of the battery. 4 Place the battery cover on the back of the device. See Attaching Battery Cover on page 30. 29 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.3.5 Attaching Battery Cover Procedure:
1 Place the battery cover on the back of the device. 2 Ensure that all battery cover snaps are fully engaged. 1.3.5.1 Removing the Battery Cover Procedure:
1 Hold the device firmly. 2 Using the battery cover removal slot, gently lift the battery cover up and away. Figure 6: Battery Cover Removal Slot The battery cover removal slot is marked as 1. 1.3.6 Charging Information Before using the LEX L11 for the first time, you must charge the battery by using the provided USB Charger and USB Cable or connect the USB Cable to the USB port of a personal computer. NOTICE: For detailed description, installation, and operation procedures for the LEX device accessories, refer to the quick start guides provided with each accessory. The LEX device typically charges the standard battery up to 90% in about 1.5h in room temperature. NOTICE: Charge times vary by ambient temperature. You can achieve better charging time by using the quick charger. 30 1 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started Batteries can be charged in temperatures from 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Note that charging is intelligently controlled by the LEX L11. To accomplish this, for short periods of time, the LEX L11 alternately enables and disables battery charging to keep the battery at acceptable temperatures. The LEX L11 LED indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures by fast blinking amber (once every two seconds). 1.3.6.1 Battery Charge Indicators The Charge and Notification LED at the top front of the LEX device indicates the battery charging and power level. Battery charging and power level are indicated also by a battery icon on the status bar. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove the device from any power source
(cradle or USB cable connection). For the location of the charge and notification LED on the LEX L11 device, see Device Overview on page 24. Table 6: LEX L11 Notification LEDs State Off Blinking blue Indications The battery is not charging. This can indicate that:
The device is not inserted correctly in the cradle. The device is not connected to a USB cable. The charger or cradle is not powered. New notifications:
New Voice Mail New notification (for example, Android App Notification) New SMS or MMS New Email Missed Call Solid green The battery is fully charged. NOTICE: This only applies when the device is connected to USB, Dual-
Unit Charger (DUC), or Multi-Unit Charger (MUC). Slowly blinking red Solid red Fast blinking red Low battery notification (10% or less). The battery is charging. Charging errors:
Too high or too low battery charging temper-
ature Invalid battery When the battery power falls below a predetermined level, the icon indicates the state, and a battery dialog box appears indicating the status of the battery. The message displays until you tap Dismiss. 31 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started To monitor battery usage, from the Home screen, tap All Apps Settings Battery. 1.3.6.2 Turning On Battery Saving Mode You can follow these steps to enter the battery saving mode. When the battery saver is turned on, some device features become unavailable, such as WLAN connectivity, mobile data, Bluetooth, GPS, NFC, and hotspot. Vibration and most background data is limited. Screen brightness in battery saving mode is reduced. Applications that rely on syncing may not update unless you open them. NOTICE: The battery saving mode turns off automatically when your device is charging. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign and tap Settings. 2 In Settings, tap Battery. 3 Select Battery saver and tap the slider next to Off. 4 Tap Turn on automatically and, from the list of options, select when you want your device to automatically enter the battery saving mode. You can select one of the following options:
Never at 5% battery at 15% battery 5 Select the option of your choice by tapping it. 1.4 Powering On the Device for the First Time The first time you turn on your device, you are guided through a setup process. NOTICE: Some of the settings selected in this procedure can be changed later in Android Settings, if needed. Procedure:
1 Turn on the device by long-pressing the Power button. The device boots up. 2 Select Exit to Google Setup Wizard and, in the Continue with Google Setup wizard prompt, tap Continue. The Welcome screen appears. 32 Figure 7: LEX L11 Welcome Screen MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 3 Choose the language in which you want your device to operate by selecting a language from the English drop-down list. 4 Tap Let's Go. 5 On the Get Connected page, connect to a Wi-Fi network available in your area. a Tap a network name of your choice. b Enter the password. c Tap Connect. 6 On the Set up email page, set up your email account by selecting one of the options available. If you have a Gmail account, you can use the same e-mail address and password to sign in. After you sign in, all your e-mail, contacts, calendar events, and other data associated with that account are synced to your device. If you do not have a Google account, you can create one during the setup process, or connect your device by using your e-mail account in another domain. 7 On the Protect your phone page, select the screen lock you want to use, and follow the on-
screen instructions. 8 On the next screen, select options of your choice and tap Next. 9 On the Anything else? screen, when finished, tap All set. If you have more than one Google account, you can add them later. Postrequisites: If you want a keyboard that matches the language selected for your LEX L11, search on keyboard and that language in the Google Play Store, then install the keyboard that your organization recommends. 33 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.5 Powering On Procedure:
Press and hold the Power button. The device boots up. 1.6 Powering Off Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button. The Power button menu displays. 2 Tap Power off. 1.7 Battery Management This section explains how to check the status of your battery and what you can do to make your battery last longer. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove the device from any AC power source (cradle or cable). To check the charge status of the main battery, from the Home screen, you can swipe the screen up from the arrow sign, and tap Battery status indicates that the battery is discharging, and Battery level lists the battery charge (as a percentage of fully charged). About Phone Status. 1.7.1 Battery Usage Monitor The Battery screen lists applications and allows you to check how much energy they consume. You can turn off applications that consume too much energy. You can access the battery usage monitor by swiping the home screen up from the arrow sign, and tapping Battery. 34 Figure 8: Battery Screen MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started The Battery screen lists the applications using the battery. The discharge graph at the top of the screen shows the rate of the battery discharge since last charged, and how long it has been running on battery power. You can tap an application in the Battery screen to display details about its power consumption. Different applications display different information. Some applications include buttons that open screens with settings to adjust power use. 1.7.2 Low Battery Notification When the battery charge level drops below 15%, you should charge the battery by using one of the charging accessories. When the battery charge drops below 15%, the device displays a notice to connect the device to power, and the red LED slowly blinks. When the battery charge drops below 1%, the device turns off. You must charge the device by using one of the charging accessories to maintain power. 1.7.3 Battery Optimization You can observe the following battery saving tips:
You can leave the device inside a cradle connected to AC power at all times when not in use. You can turn off Bluetooth and/or Wi-Fi if not needed. You can change screen time-out to be as short as possible. You can charge the device when not in use. You can set the screen to Suspend (Sleep) after a short period of non-use. You can reduce screen brightness. You can minimize use of applications that keep the device from suspending, for example, music or video applications. You can turn Battery Saver on. 35 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.7.3.1 Entering Airplane Mode The Airplane Mode disables radio-frequency signal transmission by the LEX device. When enabled, the device cannot establish any Bluetooth, GPS, telephone, or Wi-Fi connections. NOTICE: While in airplane mode, you can turn Bluetooth and/or Wi-Fi on. See Enabling Bluetooth on page 58 and Connecting to Wi-Fi Networks on page 60. Procedure:
1 Press the Power button until the Power Button menu appears. 2 Go offline by tapping Airplane mode. The airplane icon appears in the Status bar indicating that all radios are off. 36 MN005019A01-B Basic Functions Chapter 2 Basic Functions Basic functions of the LEX L11 device include touchscreen navigation, entering text by using the on-
screen keyboard, managing notifications, and others. 2.1 Home Screen Figure 9: LEX L11 Home Screen Overview Table 7: LEX L11 Home Screen Item number 1 2 3 4 5 Description Status BarDisplays status and notification icons. WidgetAn application extension that is part of an application installed on your device. Application FolderYou can group several files into folders. Application Icon Arrow SignYou can swipe up from the arrow sign to open the Apps screen. 37 123546 MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions Item number 6 Table 8: On-Screen Navigation Buttons Item Description Application ShortcutsAllow you to access your favorite applications quickly. Description Back buttonallows you to exit application win-
dows. Home buttonyou can tap it to return to the home screen. Overview buttonallows you to view a list of applications that are currently open on your LEX device. You can manage the application windows. See Switching to Multiple Active Win-
dows View on page 41. 2.2 Touchscreen Navigation The LEX device is equipped with a multi-touch screen. Table 9: Touchscreen Actions Action Tap Tap and Hold Drag Swipe 38 Result You can tap to:
Select items on the screen Type letters and symbols using the on-
screen keyboard Press on-screen buttons You can tap and hold:
An item on the Home screen to move it to a new location (by dragging it) or to remove An item in Apps to create a shortcut on the Home screen An empty area on the Home screen until the menu appears An application to perform application actions You can tap and hold an item for a moment and then move your finger on the screen until you reach the new position for that item. You can move your finger up, down, left, or right on the screen to:
Unlock the screen View additional Home screens Action Result MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions Double-tap Pinch View additional application icons in the Launcher window View more information on an application screen You can tap twice on a webpage, map, or other screen to zoom in and out. In some applications, you can zoom in and out by placing two fingers on the screen and pinch-
ing them together (to zoom out) or spreading them apart (to zoom in). 2.3 On-Screen Keyboard The on-screen keyboard is used to enter text in a text field. Text Editing You can edit entered text and use menu commands to cut, copy, and paste text within or across applications. Some applications do not support editing some or all of the text they display; others may offer their own way to select text. Numbers, Symbols, and Special Characters To enter numbers and symbols:
Without switching to the Numbers or Symbols keyboard, it is possible to tap and hold one of the top-row keys until a menu appears and then select a number. By tapping the arrow key, you can enter a capital letter. When you tap and hold the arrow key until it becomes underlined, you can enter two or more capital letters. By tapping the arrow key again, you can return to the lowercase keyboard. By tapping the ?123 key, you can switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. By tapping the By tapping and holding a key, you can open a menu with additional characters available under that key, you can view additional symbols. key. 2.3.1 Google Keyboard Settings The Google Keyboard Settings may be personalized to meet your preferences. Table 10: Google Keyboard Settings Google keyboard settings are located at Settings Languages & Input Virtual keyboard Gboard. Setting Languages Description You can select the language to be used in the keyboard. 39 MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions Setting Preferences Theme Text correction Glide Typing Voice Typing Dictionary Search Advanced Description Allows you to adjust settings such as one-hand-
ed mode, sound on keypress, vibrate on key-
press, and others. Allows you to select the keyboard theme: you can choose from one of your images, or from other themes available on the device. You can choose from text correction options, such as show suggestion strip, block offensive words, suggest contact names, auto-correction, and others. These settings allow you to enter a word by sliding through the letters on the keyboard. You can adjust voice typing settings, such as the language to be spoken. You can choose to sync learned words, or to delete learned words from your personal dic-
tionary. You can choose to use predictive search, or to show the Search and more button in the sug-
gestion strip for faster access to Search. These settings allow you to display application icons in the launcher, or to have a physical ALT key show the emoji keyboard. You an also de-
cide to improve Gboard statistics. 2.3.2 Google Voice Typing You can enter text by speaking. Procedure:
1 On the Google keyboard, tap 2 Start speaking your text. 3 When finished, tap
. 2.3.2.1 Adjusting Google Voice Typing Settings Procedure:
1 On the home screen, swipe up from the arrow sign and tap Settings. 2 Select Languages & Input Virtual keyboard Google voice typing. 3 Configure the settings of your choice. 40 MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions 2.4 Status Bar Icons Status icons give you status information on actions occurring on your LEX device. Table 11: Status Bar Icons For the location of the Status Bar, see Home Screen on page 37. Icon Description Indicates the battery is fully charged. Indicates the battery level is low (20% or less). Indicates the battery is charging. Indicates the alarm is active. Indicates the Bluetooth service is on. Indicates that the device is connected to a Wi-Fi network. Indicates that there is no Wi-Fi signal. Indicates all sounds except media and alarms are silenced and vibrate mode is active. Indicates the Airplane Mode is active. Indicates that location services are on. Indicates that a file was downloaded to the de-
vice. Indicates that a file was sent from the device. Indicates that do not disturb is on. Indicates mobile network signal strength. Indicates no SIM card is present. Indicates howling suppression is on. 2.5 Switching to Multiple Active Windows View The LEX device supports multi-window view, which allows for dragging and dropping data between the panes. You can view two applications side-by-side on your device screen. This feature works in both portrait and landscape mode. 41 MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions NOTICE: Some applications may not support this functionality. Procedure:
1 Start the applications that you want to use simultaneously. 2 Long press the square Overview button located at the bottom of the device screen. The screen splits in two. One half of it displays the most recently opened application, and the other one displays a list of the rest of the recently opened applications. 3 Select an application by sliding your finger on the list of applications and tapping an application of your choice. 2.6 Accessing Files from a Computer Procedure:
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB type C cable. 2 Open the Notifications panel by swiping the screen down from the Status bar. Figure 10: Notifications Panel 3 Tap the USB for... notification. 4 In the Use USB to screen, select one of the following:
If you want to transfer files to Windows or Mac (MTP), select File transfers. If you want to access photos or other files on a computer that does not support MTP, select Photo transfer (PTP). If you want to use LEX for MIDI input, select MIDI. 42 MN005019A01-B Device Settings Chapter 3 Device Settings This chapter describes ways to personalize your LEX L11 device by changing the default device settings. NOTICE: If you cannot access features described in this section, contact your device technician for more information. 3.1 Covert Mode In the Covert Mode, the device goes dark and quiet. All visible and audible alerts and notifications are shut down. This feature makes the LEX device effectively unnoticeable even in a silent and dark environment. In Covert Mode, the following sounds, visual indications, and keys are disabled:
Display backlight Touchscreen Keylight LED indications Vibration and haptics - optional Speaker audio NOTICE: In Covert Mode, sound is routed to a Bluetooth headset, if connected or sound is routed to a wired earpiece, if connected. Alternatively, sound is routed to the earpiece. In Covert Mode, the following features remain active:
Power button PTT button Emergency button Talkgroup Rocker button Programmable buttons Volume button Audio indications are available using a wired headset (through headset port) or a Bluetooth headset. When the LEX device is in covert mode, after a long press of the power key, the device illuminates the display backlight at low intensity to display the Power button menu where you can exit covert mode. 3.1.1 Turning On Covert Mode Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The Power Button menu appears. 43 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 2 Tap Covert mode. The screen goes blank. 3.1.2 Turning Off Covert Mode Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The Power Button menu appears. 2 Tap Covert mode. All audible and visual settings, such as loudspeaker volume, display brightness, and vibration, return to the same settings and levels as they were before the device entered the Covert Mode. 3.1.3 Configuring Covert Mode Procedure:
1 In Settings, select Languages & input. 2 Tap Covert Mode settings. 3 Adjust the slidebars next to the options of your choice. 3.2 Setting Programmable Buttons You can set the LEX L11 programmable buttons to perform various actions. Each button can have two functions: one for short press, and one for long press. For the exact location of the programmable buttons on the LEX L11 device, see Device Overview on page 24. NOTICE: Programmable buttons are pre-programmed with default settings, which can generate events even before provisioning. Procedure:
1 From the main menu, pull down the Notification bar. 2 Tap Settings 3 In the Programmable Buttons window, select one of the following options:
Languages and Input Programmable buttons. Programmable button -1- short press Programmable button -1- long press Programmable button -2- short press Programmable button -2- long press 4 From the list of available applications/settings, select one application/setting by tapping the radio button next to it. The list of available options is as follows:
Covert mode ON/OFF toggle - default for long press on top programmable button Home 44 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings Screen brightness up Screen brightness down Camera - default for short press on top programmable button Answer call (when ringing) or end call (when in call) - default for short press on bottom programmable button Ringer/Media Mute/Unmute - default for long press on bottom programmable button No event OK Google (open in Google App listening for instructions) 3.3 LEX Series Screen Lock You can cause the LEX device screen to lock automatically by specifying a pattern, PIN, password, or a fingerprint. If you establish a PIN, pattern, password, or a fingerprint as a preferred way to unlock the device screen, you can keep your data secured. NOTICE: If the device screen lock option is set to None or Swipe, your data is not secured and can be accessed by anyone. When the device is on, you can lock your device by pressing the Power button, and unlock by providing a pattern, PIN, password, or a fingerprint. If you did not specify a pattern, PIN, password, or a fingerprint, you can also unlock the LEX device by swiping up the device screen, or only by pressing the Power button if no locking option was set. When the device is locked and cellular network signal is available, phone calls, notification of new messages, missed calls and upcoming appointments still can be received. You can also set the device to automatically lock after a specified time. See Setting Timeout for Locking on page 47. 3.3.1 Selecting a Locking Option Security dictates a specific level of locking for the LEX device screen. You may protect the device by setting a password, PIN, a pattern, or a fingerprint as a locking option, but you may also decide not to select any of these options at all (not recommended). NOTICE: Your account may enforce more stringent locking requirements than those listed here. For more information, contact your device administrator. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign, and tap 2 Select Security Screen lock. The following options are displayed:
None. Swipe You must slide the lock to unlock the device. Pattern You must replicate a specified pattern to unlock the device. PIN You must enter a PIN to unlock the device. Password You must enter a specified password to unlock the device. 45 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3 Select an option of your choice by tapping it. If If you selected PIN, If you selected Pattern, If you selected Password, The device is set to lock. 46 Then perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your PIN when it starts up, in the Secure start-up window, tap Require PIN to start device. b In the Choose your PIN window, enter a PIN code of at least four digits and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your PIN. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your pattern when it starts up, in the Secure start-up window, tap Require pattern to start device. b In the Choose your pattern window, create your pattern that connects at least four dots and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your pattern. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your password when it starts up, in the Se-
cure start-up window, tap Require password to start device. b In the Choose your password window, enter a password of at least four charac-
ters and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your password. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.3.2 Setting Timeout for Locking You may specify the timeout for device locking. After the set amount of time, the device automatically locks. Prerequisites: Ensure that the screen lock is set to pattern, PIN, or password. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Select Security. next to Screen lock. 3 Tap 4 Tap Automatically lock. 5 Select a timeout value from the list. 3.3.3 Device Unlock When the LEX device is not used for a period of time and you try to access the device, the Lock screen displays. Depending on which Screen lock option is active, you can do one of the following:
Nothing. Swipe the screen. Enter a pattern, PIN, or password, or unlock the device by using a fingerprint. 3.3.3.1 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 Swipe the screen from the bottom upwards. 3 By using a finger, draw the specified pattern on the screen. Once the correct pattern is drawn, the device unlocks. 3.3.3.2 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 Swipe the screen from the bottom upwards. 3 In the text field, enter your PIN or password. 4 Tap
. The device unlocks and the Home screen is shown. 47 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.3.3.3 Setting Unlock with Fingerprint You can follow this procedure to be able to unlock your device by touching the fingerprint sensor. You can use your fingerprint to unlock applications. NOTICE:
A fingerprint may be less secure than a strong PIN, pattern, or password. Your account may enforce more stringent locking requirements than those listed here. For more information, contact your device administrator. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign, and tap 2 Select Security Fingerprint. 3 In the Unlock with fingerprint window, tap NEXT. 4 In the Unlock selection window, choose your backup screen lock method. The backup method is used when:
You restart the device The fingerprint sensor does not recognize your fingerprint after a few attempts You switch to a different user You did not use your backup method to unlock your device for more than 48 hours. 5 Depending on the choice you made in step 4, perform one of the following actions:
If If you selected PIN, If you selected Pattern, 48 Then perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your PIN when it starts up, in the Secure start-up window, tap Require PIN to start device. b In the Choose your PIN window, enter a PIN code of at least four digits and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your PIN. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your pattern when it starts up, in the Secure start-up window, tap Require pattern to start device. b In the Choose your pattern window, create your pattern that connects at least four dots and tap CONTINUE. If Then MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings If you selected Password, c Confirm your pattern. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your password when it starts up, in the Se-
cure start-up window, tap Require password to start device. b In the Choose your password window, enter a password of at least four charac-
ters and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your password. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. 6 Add your fingerprint by following the on-screen instructions. The fingerprint sensor is located on the back of the device. See Device Overview on page 24. 7 In the Fingerprint added screen, tap DONE. You can add more than one fingerprint. 3.3.3.3.1 Unlocking the Device by Using the Fingerprint Sensor Procedure:
Press your finger to the fingerprint sensor on the back of the device. The device screen unlocks. 3.3.4 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device You can make an emergency call even when the LEX device is locked and you do not remember your PIN, pattern, or password. Procedure:
1 Press the Power button. 2 Tap EMERGENCY at the bottom of the lock screen. The Emergency Dialer screen displays. 3 Enter the emergency number. 4 Tap
. 49 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.4 Setting Date and Time When the LEX device is connected to cellular network, date and time are automatically synchronized. You can perform this procedure to manually set the date and time on your LEX device. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap 3 Tap Date & time. 4 Disable automatic date and time synchronization by tapping Automatic date & time. 5 Disable automatic time zone synchronization by tapping Automatic time zone. 6 Tap Set date. 7 Select a month, date and year. 8 Tap OK. 9 Tap Set time. 10 Select the hour, minutes and part of the day by sliding your finger up and down. 11 Tap OK. 12 Tap Select time zone. 13 Tap to select a time zone from the list. 3.5 Setting the Display The following LEX device display features can be customized:
Brightness level Set the brightness of the display. Adaptive brightness Optimize brightness level for available light. Wallpaper Choose a background type on the home and lock screens. Sleep Set the time the device waits before turning off the backlight of the display. Screen saver Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is docked inside a cradle or charging. Ambient display Wake screen when you receive notifications. Font size Change the font size for display text. Display size Change the display size. When device is rotated Rotate the contents of the screen. Cast Enable the device to project the screen to a TV or other device. 3.5.1 Setting Screen Brightness Level Procedure:
1 In Settings 2 Set the brightness level by adjusting the Brightness level slidebar.
, tap Display Brightness level. 50 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.5.2 Setting Adaptive Brightness Optimize brightness level for available light. Procedure:
From Display, set the Adaptive brightness slidebar to the ON position. 3.5.3 Changing Wallpapers You can set an image or a photo stored in your device as your home screen wallpaper. Procedure:
1 Tap and hold the home screen. 2 From the context menu, select Wallpapers. 3 Scroll through the available images and tap a photo or image of your choice. 4 Tap Set wallpaper. 3.5.4 Setting Up Sleep Mode Use this procedure to set up sleep mode (screen time-out). Procedure:
1 From Settings 2 Select one of the sleep values by tapping a value of your choice.
, tap Display Sleep. 3.5.5 Setting Up Screen Saver Procedure:
, select Display Screen saver. 1 In Settings 2 Select one of the available options by tapping it. You can configure your the options by tapping next to your selection. 3 Tap
, tap When to start screen saver and select when you would like the feature to be active (While docked, while charging, or either). 4 Preview and confirm your selection by tapping Start now. 3.5.6 Setting Font Size Procedure:
1 In Display settings, tap Font size. 2 Slide your finger on the scale to adjust the font size. 51 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.5.7 Setting Display Size Procedure:
1 In Display settings, tap Display size. 2 Adjust the display size by sliding your finger left to right on the scale. 3.5.8 Setting Screen Rotation Screen rotation enables the LEX device to automatically determine the orientation of the screen to portrait or landscape. NOTICE: Some applications may not support screen rotation. Procedure:
1 In the Display settings, tap When device is rotated. 2 Select one of the following options:
If you want the screen to rotate, select Rotate the contents of the screen. If you do not want the screen to rotate, select Stay in portrait view. 3.5.9 Enabling Cast Screen When and where to use: You can use this procedure to enable the LEX device to project the screen to a TV or other device. Procedure:
1 In the Display settings, tap Cast. 2 Tap . 3 Select Enable wireless display. 3.6 Sound Settings Sound settings allow you to configure default media, alarm, and ring volume levels and ringtones. 3.6.1 Adjusting Sound Settings Sound settings allow you to adjust media, alarm, and ring volume. Procedure:
Sound & notification. 1 Tap 2 Adjust the slidebars for media, alarm, and ring volume. 3 If you want your device to vibrate for calls, adjust the slidebar for Also vibrate for calls. 52 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.6.2 Enabling Howling Suppression You can enable a microphone and loudspeaker sound profile that suppresses feedback loop and screeching or howling noise in a half-duplex call when sending and receiving phones are close to each other. Procedure:
Enable howling suppression by performing one of the following actions:
If If you want to enable howling suppres-
sion from the Settings menu, If you want to enable howling suppres-
sion from the Quick Settings panel, Then perform the following actions:
a From the main menu, tap Settings Sound. b Slide the Howling Suppression toggle to ON. perform the following actions:
a Pull down the Quick Settings panel. b Tap
. 3.6.2.1 Disabling Howling Suppression You can perform this procedure to disable the howling suppression feature. Procedure:
1 From the main menu, tap Settings Sound. 2 Disable howling suppression by performing one of the following actions:
If If you want to disable howling suppres-
sion from the Settings menu, Then perform the following actions:
a From the main menu, tap Settings Sound. b Slide the Howling Suppression toggle to OFF. If you want to disable howling suppres-
sion from the Notifications panel, perform the following actions:
a Pull down the Notifications panel. b Tap
. 53 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.6.3 Setting Up Do Not Disturb The Do not disturb setting allows you to mute alarms, reminders, events, messages, and calls. You can set a schedule so that Do not disturb is turned on and off automatically. You can set exceptions on chosen elements. Procedure:
Sound Do not disturb Priority only allows. 1 Tap 2 Set exceptions by following these steps:
a If you want to unmute Reminders, adjust the Reminders slidebar. b If you want to unmute Events, adjust the Events slidebar. c If you want to set exception on Messages, select Messages and choose from the list of available options. d If you want to set exception on Calls, tap Calls and choose from the list of available options. e If you want to repeat callers, adjust the Repeat callers slidebar. 3.6.3.1 Setting Automatic Rules Automatic rules allow you to set a schedule when Do not disturb turns on and off automatically. Procedure:
Sound Do not disturb Automatic rules. 1 Tap 2 Choose from the following automatic rules:
If If you want to set automatic rules for weekends, If you want to set automatic rules for weeknights, 54 Then perform the following actions:
a Select Weekend and adjust the slidebar to the On position. b Set the following:
Rule name Days Start time End time Do not disturb Alarm can override end time perform the following actions:
a Select Weeknights and adjust the slide-
bar to the On position. b Set the following:
Rule name If Then MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings If you want to set automatic rules for events, If you want to add a new rule, Days Start time End time Do not disturb Alarm can override end time perform the following actions:
a Select Event and adjust the slidebar to the On position. b Set the following:
Rule name During events for Where reply is Do not disturb perform the following actions:
a Select Add rule. b Enter the rule name and set it to time rule or event rule. c Set the following:
Rule name Days Start time End time Do not disturb Alarm can override end time 3.6.4 Enabling Hearing Aid Compatibility You can follow this procedure to enable hearing aid compatibility on your LEX L11 device. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has adopted hearing-aid compatibility (HAC) requirements for digital wireless phones. By using a hearing aid with a hearing aid compatible LEX L11, you can improve your ability to hear on the phone. WARNING: When the hearing aid compatibility is enabled, the handset mode volume level of voice calls may be increased above safe levels. Listening at a high volume for a long time may damage your hearing. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap 3 Select Sound. 4 Tap Other sounds. 55 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 5 Enable hearing aid compatibility by setting the Hearing aid compatibility toggle to the ON position. 3.6.4.1 Disabling Hearing Aid Compatibility Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap 3 Select Sound. 4 Tap Other sounds. 5 Disable hearing aid compatibility by setting the Hearing aid compatibility toggle to the OFF position. 56 MN005019A01-B Wireless Chapter 4 Wireless This section provides information on the wireless features of the LEX L11 device. 4.1 Bluetooth Profiles The LEX device supports a wide range of Bluetooth services. Table 12: Bluetooth Profiles Bluetooth Profile Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP SRC) Handsfree Profile (HFP AG) Headset Profile (HSP AG) Human Interface Device Profile (HID Host) Serial Port Profile (SPP Dev A, Dev B) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Service Discovery Application Profile (SDAP) Dial-up Networking (DUN GW) Profile Generic Object Exchange Profile (GOEP) Object Push Profile (OPP Client/Server) Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile
(GAVDP) Message Access Profile (MAP MSE) Description Allows the device to stream stereo-quality audio to a wireless headset or wireless stereo speak-
ers. Provides the capability for carkits and Bluetooth headset to be used for phone calls and control them (initiate, answer, terminate, and other). Provides support for the popular Bluetooth headsets to be used with mobile phones with ability to ring, answer a call, hang up, and ad-
just the volume. Allows Bluetooth keyboards, pointing devices, gaming devices, and remote monitoring devices to connect to the device. Sets up a virtual serial port and connects two Bluetooth-enabled devices. For example, con-
necting the device to a printer. This profile defines how Bluetooth-enabled de-
vices can make themselves available and how two devices can communicate directly with each other. Describes how an application should use SDP to discover services on a remote device. Allows the device to share Internet connection with another device. Provides a basis for other data profiles. Allows the device to push and pull objects to and from a push server. Provides the basis for A2DP and VDP. This pro-
file defines two roles: initiator (INT) and accept-
or (ACP). Allows exchange of messages between devi-
ces. 57 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless Bluetooth Profile Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP TG) Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP PSE) File Transfer Profile (FTP Server) Personal Area Networking (PAN NAP/PANU) Profile Proximity Profile (PXP Monitor) Health Device Profile (HDP) SIM Access Profile (SAP) Generic Attribute (GATT) and attribute protocol
(ATT) Description Allows remote devices to control audio playback on local device (for example: play, pause, stop, adjust volume). Allows exchange of Phone Book Objects be-
tween a car kit and a mobile phone to allow the car kit to display the name of the incoming call-
er; allow the car kit to download the phone book so the user can initiate a call from the car dis-
play. Provides the capability to expose local file sys-
tem to remote devices which can manipulate and transfer files. Allows the device to share Internet connection with another device (for example a laptop) and to access the Internet shared by another device
(for example a Bluetooth enabled phone). Enables proximity monitoring between two devi-
ces. Makes transmission and reception of Medical Device data possible. Allows devices with built-in GSM transceivers to connect to a SIM card in a Bluetooth enabled phone. These devices do not need to have sep-
arate SIM cards. Allows profile discovery and description serv-
ices for Bluetooth Low Energy protocol. 4.2 Bluetooth Power States The Bluetooth radio is off by default. The following modes are available:
Suspend When the device goes into suspend mode, the Bluetooth radio stays on. Airplane Mode When the device is placed in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio turns off. When Airplane Mode is disabled, the Bluetooth radio returns to the prior state. When in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio can be turned back on if desired. 4.3 Enabling Bluetooth Bluetooth allows you to send to and receive data from other Bluetooth-enabled devices paired with your LEX device. Procedure:
1 On the Settings 2 Switch the Bluetooth slidebar to the On position. page, tap Bluetooth. 58 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless 4.4 Disabling Bluetooth Procedure:
1 On the Settings 2 Switch the Bluetooth slidebar to the Off position. page, tap Bluetooth. 4.5 Renaming the Device By default, your LEX device has a generic Bluetooth name visible to other devices when connected. Procedure:
1 In Settings 2 If Bluetooth is not on, adjust the Bluetooth slidebar.
, tap Bluetooth. and select Rename this device. 3 Tap 4 Enter a new device name and tap Rename. 4.6 Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices The LEX device can receive and send data when paired with other Bluetooth-enabled devices. Prerequisites: Ensure that Bluetooth is enabled on both devices, and that the device you want to pair your LEX with is in discoverable mode. Procedure:
1 On the Settings 2 Enable Bluetooth by adjusting the slidebar to the ON position. page, tap Bluetooth. The device searches for available Bluetooth-enabled devices and lists them. 3 Scroll through the list and tap a device name. The Pairing request dialog box displays. 4 Compare the pass keys on both devices and tap Pair on both devices. The device is added to the Paired devices list. 4.6.1 Managing Bluetooth Devices You can manage Bluetooth devices paired with your LEX by renaming the devices, sharing contacts, and more. Procedure:
1 Tap 2 If you want to rename the device, tap the Name field. located next to a paired Bluetooth device. 59 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless 3 If you want to unpair the device, tap Forget. 4 If you want to share contacts with the device, tap Contact sharing. Some Bluetooth-enabled accessories/devices allow for more profiles to be used. 4.7 Connecting to Wi-Fi Networks Wi-Fi is a wireless network technology that provides Internet access at distance up to 100 feet, depending on the Wi-Fi router and surroundings. You can access Internet when you connect your LEX device to a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign and tap Settings 2 Tap WLAN. The device searches for wireless networks in the area and lists them. 3 Scroll through the list and select the desired network. 4 Enter the password and tap Connect. You can verify the password before connecting by tapping Show password. Adding New Networks You can add a Wi-Fi network that does not broadcast its name (SSID), or is currently out of range. Procedure:
1 In the WLAN screen, select Add network. 2 Enter the following details:
Network name: The wireless network SSID Security: Set the security type to None, WEP, WPA/WPA2 PSK, 802.1x EAP 3 Tap Show Advanced Options and set the Proxy details and IP settings. 4 Tap SAVE. Editing Networks Procedure:
1 Touch and hold the connected network. 2 Select Modify Network. 3 Save the settings by tapping Save. Forgetting Networks You can disconnect your device from a remembered wireless network. Procedure:
1 Touch and hold the connected network. 60 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless 2 Select Forget Network. The device disconnects from the selected network. You are prompted for the password if you try to connect to the same network again. 4.8 Configuring Wi-Fi Hotspots The LEX device can serve as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot, which allows you to connect 32 other devices to the wireless Internet provided by the LEX device. In Wi-Fi Access Point mode, the LEX L11 device supports two authentication types:
None WPA2-PSK Prerequisites: Ensure that your device has Internet connection. Procedure:
1 From the home screen, swipe the screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap Settings. 3 In the Wireless and networks section, tap More .... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Tap Set up WLAN hotspot. The Set up WLAN hotspot screen displays. Figure 11: Set up WLAN Hotspot Dialog Box 6 In the Network Name text field, edit the network name. 7 Tap the Security option and select a security method from the drop-down list:
None WPA2 PSK 8 In the Password text field, enter a password. NOTICE: If None is selected in the Security field, a password is not required. 61 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless 9 Under Select AP Band, tap the 2.4 GHz Band drop-down list, and select one of the following options:
2.4 GHz 5 GHz Without the SIM card, only the 2.4 GHz band is supported. 10 Tap Save. 4.9 Setting Up USB Tethering You can share your mobile Internet connection with a computer or with other devices. Prerequisites: Connect your device to a computer by using a USB cable. Procedure:
1 On the Settings 2 Enable USB tethering. page, tap More Tethering & Portable hotspot. 4.10 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering You can use this procedure to tether Bluetooth to share the data connection with a host computer. Prerequisites: Configure the host computer to obtain its network connection using Bluetooth. For more information, see the host computer documentation. Procedure:
1 Pair the LEX device with the host computer. See Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices on page 59. 2 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign and tap Settings 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Adjust the Bluetooth tethering slidebar. The host computer is now sharing the LEX device data connection. 4.11 Near-Field Communication Near-field communication (NFC) allows you to establish one- and two-way communication between two electronic devices by bringing them close to each other at a distance of max. 2 cm. The following are the examples of how NFC could be used. Some of the examples may require the use of other applications:
LEX L11 can act as a badge for physical access (doors entry) LEX L11 can be used as a physical token to access protected networks and/or services NFC tag reading 62 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless NOTICE:
The NFC feature is set to OFF by default. You can turn NFC on or off when the device is in Airplane mode. Turning on NFC displays the current setting for Tap and Pay in Android Settings. The practical applications of NFC available to the user may depend on other applications. 4.11.1 Turning NFC On You can perform this procedure to enable near-field communication (NFC) transfers between your LEX L11 device and other devices. Procedure:
Pull down the Quick Settings panel, and perform one of the following actions:
If If you want to turn NFC on from the Quick Settings panel, If you want to turn NFC on from the Set-
tings page, Then slide the NFC toggle to the ON position. perform the following actions:
a Tap Settings b On the Settings page, tap Wireless and
. Network More. You can start using the NFC feature on your device. You can transfer data to and from other devices when your LEX device touches another device. NOTICE: The maximum distance between the devices is two (2) cm. c Set the NFC slidebar to the On position. 4.11.2 Turning NFC Off You can perform this procedure to disable the near field communication (NFC) feature on your LEX L11 device. Procedure:
Pull down the Quick Settings panel. If If you want to turn NFC off from the Quick Settings panel, If you want to turn NFC off from the Set-
tings page, Then slide the NFC toggle to the OFF position. perform the following actions:
a Tap Settings b On the Settings page, tap Wireless and
. Network More. c Set the NFC slidebar to the OFF position. 63 MN005019A01-B Chapter 5: Contacts Chapter 5 Contacts You can use the Contacts application to maintain phone numbers and other data. 5.1 Adding New Contacts You can add new contacts to the phonebook. Procedure:
1 On the home screen, tap
. 2 Tap
, and enter the contact details. 3 Add the new contact by tapping SAVE. 5.2 Editing Contact Details You can edit the details of your contacts. Procedure:
1 On the home screen, tap 2 Tap the contact that you want to modify. 3 Tap 4 Edit the required details, and tap SAVE. 5.3 Searching Contacts You can use the search option to quickly find specific contacts from the list. Procedure:
1 On the home screen, tap
. 2 Tap and perform one of the following actions:
If you want to browse by name, enter the first few letters of the contact name. If you want to browse by phone number, enter the first few digits of the contact phone number. All contacts that contain the text entered in the search field are displayed. 64 MN005019A01-B Chapter 5: Contacts 5.4 Sharing Contacts You can send contact information by MMS, Bluetooth, Drive, and e-mail. Procedure:
1 Open the Contacts application. Select. 2 Tap 3 Tap the contacts that you want to share. 4 Tap 5 From the list of suggested sharing applications, tap the application of your choice. 6 Choose when to select the transfer mode by selecting one of the following options:
To select the transfer mode each time, tap Just Once. To send contacts by using the same method, tap Always. 65 MN005019A01-B Chapter 6: Calling Chapter 6 Calling This chapter describes using the Phone application, for example making calls and conference calls. 6.1 Making Calls Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 Dial a number by performing one of the following actions:
. If If you want to make a call by directly en-
tering a number, Then perform the following actions:
If you want to make a call by using Speed Dial, a Tap
. b Enter the phone number and tap perform the following actions:
. a Tap b Tap and hold the key that corresponds to
. a contact number that you want to call. If you want to call a recently called num-
ber, perform the following actions:
If you want to make a call by searching the contacts already saved on your de-
vice, a Tap b From the list, tap the contact that you
. want to call. c Tap perform the following actions:
a Tap b From the list, tap the contact that you
. want to call. 3 If you want to adjust audio settings during the call, perform one of the following actions:
c When the contact displays, tap next to the number. 66 MN005019A01-B Chapter 6: Calling Then tap tap
. If You want to turn on the speakerphone, You want to mute the call, 4 End the call by tapping
. 6.1.1 Setting Up Speed Dial Procedure:
1 Open the Phone application. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold 2. 4 In the Key unassigned prompt, tap Yes. 5 In the Speed dial settings window, tap a key to assign a contact to it. 6 In the prompt, enter the number that you want to assign to the selected key, or tap the Contacts icon next to the field to select a number from a contact list. 7 When finished, tap OK. 6.2 Making Conference Calls You can use this procedure to create a conference call with multiple people. Conference calling (Add Call) is available if you want to talk to more than one user at a time. NOTICE: Conference calling may not be supported by your service provider. Check with your service provider technical support for conference calling availability. The total number of conference call participants may be limited by your service provider. For the maximum number of participants in a conference call, contact your service provider technical support. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 Dial a number by performing one of the following actions:
. If If you want to make a call by directly en-
tering a number, Then perform the following actions:
If you want to make a call by using Speed Dial, a Tap
. b Enter the phone number and tap perform the following actions:
. 67 MN005019A01-B Chapter 6: Calling If Then a Tap b Tap and hold the key that corresponds to
. a contact number that you want to call. If you want to call a recently called num-
ber, perform the following actions:
a Tap b From the list, tap the contact that you
. want to call. c Tap perform the following actions:
a Tap b From the list, tap the contact that you
. want to call. c When the contact displays, tap next to the number. If you want to make a call by searching the contacts already saved on your de-
vice, 3 While in your call, tap
. The first person is put on hold. 4 Dial the second person. See step 2. 5 Tap to join the two calls together. The device screen states Conference Call and everyone can talk and hear one another. 6 Tap to end the call. 6.3 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset You can follow this procedure to answer calls by using a Bluetooth headset. When you receive a phone call, the Incoming Call screen opens, displaying the caller ID and any additional information about the caller that is in the contact application. Prerequisites: Ensure your LEX device is paired with the Bluetooth accessory. See Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices on page 59. Procedure:
1 When a call arrives, tap the Call button on the Bluetooth headset to answer the call. 2 To silence the ringer before answering the call, press the volume down button on the side of device. 3 To end the call press the Call button on the Bluetooth headset. 68 MN005019A01-B Chapter 6: Calling All incoming calls are recorded in the Phone (
miss a call, you receive a notification.
) application, in the Recents tab. If you 6.4 Call Settings In Call settings, you can adjust display options, sounds and vibration, select quick responses, and many more. NOTICE: Not all options are available for all configurations. Call settings are located at Settings. 69 MN005019A01-B Chapter 7: Messaging Chapter 7 Messaging LEX device can be used to send and receive text messages on the service provider network. The LEX device uses the Phone application. NOTICE: If your Organization requires a Public Safety Experience (PSX) for text messaging, contact your device technician. The LEX device supports the following types of text messages:
Text messages You can send and receive simple messages containing text to other mobile phones (also known as SMS). Multimedia messages You can send and receive text messages with pictures, video, and/or sound to other mobile phones
(also known as MMS). NOTICE: Messaging service availability depends on your network and service plan. 7.1 Sending Messages You can use this procedure to send text and multimedia messages. Procedure:
1 From Home screen tap
. 2 Tap 3 In the To field, type a name, a phone number, or an email address. As you enter text in the field, matching contacts appear. 4 Tap the contact from the list. 5 In the Type an SMS message field, type your message. 6 You can add the media of your choice by tapping and choosing one of the available options. The available options are as follows:
Table 13: Message Media Type Icons 70 Description Emojis - Attach a small digital image or icon to express an idea or emotion. Camera - Take a pictures or record video and share. Media - Share photos, media, and files. MN005019A01-B Chapter 7: Messaging Icons Description Microphone - Record audio and share. Location - Snap your location and share. 7 Send the message by tapping
. 71 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios Chapter 8 Collaboration with LMR Radios Radio Services is a free application available on the device that enables the LEX device to connect with a Land Mobile Radio (LMR). You can connect your LEX device with an LMR radio. The supported LMR radios are as follows:
Table 14: ASTRO (APX) Radios Supported by LEX L11 Release R17.01.00 and Later Releases of the Following ASTRO APX Radio Models APX 6000 APX 6000XE APX 7000 APX 7000XE APX 8000 APX 8000XE Table 15: TETRA Radios Supported by LEX L11 TETRA Radio Models TETRA MTP3000 series radios TETRA MTP6000 series radios When in collaborative mode with a TETRA or APX radio, the LEX device supports both half-duplex private calls and group PTT calls sent to and from the TETRA or APX radio. NOTICE:
If you cannot access features described in this chapter, contact your device technician for more information. TETRA radios need to be provisioned to use the LEX L11 device as an accessory. 8.1 Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Radio for PTT Communications The LEX device supports Push-To-Talk (PTT) communications in two different modes PTT through Land Mobile Radio (LMR), or Broadband PTT through PSX PTT solution. The LEX device can operate in only one of these modes at a time. You can switch between the two modes using the PSX Cockpit application. NOTICE: For more information on using the PSX Cockpit application and the PSX Push-to-Talk application, see the PSX User Guide and/or WAVE 7000 Push-to-Talk for Mobile Devices manual. Prerequisites: Obtain the PSX Cockpit application. 72 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios NOTICE: To access the PSX Cockpit sidebar menu settings, you must log on to the PSX Cockpit application. If needed, contact your Motorola Solutions representative to obtain an account. Procedure:
1 Swipe the Home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 On the Apps screen, tap
. 3 Display the PSX Cockpit sidebar menu by tapping 4 In the PSX Cockpit sidebar menu, tap the PTT that you currently use. Figure 12: PSX Cockpit Sidebar Menu 5 In the Push to Talk screen, choose the PTT that you want to use:
If you want to use the LMR radio for PTT communications, select Radio. If you want to make Broadband PTT calls through the PSX PTT application, select WAVE. Figure 13: Push to Talk Screen Choosing LMR or WAVE not only sets your choice for PTT functionality, but configures the emergency button. Selecting Radio enables the Radio Services application on the LEX and disables the PSX PTT application on the LEX automatically. 73 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios Selecting WAVE automatically enables the PSX PTT application on the LEX and disables the Radio Services application on the LEX. 6 Tap OK. 8.2 Pairing Radio with the LEX Device You can pair the LEX device with a Land Mobile Radio (LMR) to send and receive PTT calls. The devices remember each other and automatically resume connection when they are on and within connection range. Prerequisites: Ensure the following:
Verify whether your LMR radio is supported for pairing with the LEX device. For the list of supported radios, see Collaboration with LMR Radios on page 72. Turn on Bluetooth on the LEX device and on the radio. For more information, see Enabling Bluetooth on page 58. Ensure the LEX device is not paired with any previously paired Bluetooth devices. For more information, see Managing Bluetooth Devices on page 59. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 From the Apps screen, tap Radio Services
. Figure 14: Secure Pairing Screen 3 In the Secure Pairing window, tap Pair. 4 In the Bluetooth window, set the Bluetooth slidebar to the ON position. 5 Tap Refresh and select the radio from the list of available devices. 74 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios NOTICE: Ensure the LMR Radio is in discoverable mode. The Bluetooth pairing prompt appears. 6 Compare the pairing code on the LEX device with the code on the LMR radio and tap Pair. 7 On the LMR radio, select Accept. The LMR radio is paired with your LEX device. 8.3 Unpairing Radio from the LEX Device You can follow this procedure to unpair the LEX device from the Land Mobile Radio (LMR). Procedure:
1 Start the Radio Services application. 2 In the Radio Services window, tap Unpair and tap OK. Figure 15: Radio Services Overflow Menu 8.4 Selecting Zones and Channels You can select zones and channels to communicate with other users. Prerequisites: Ensure your Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is successfully paired with the LEX device. Procedure:
1 Start the Radio Services application. 2 Select a zone by tapping a zone of your choice. The Channel selection screen appears, displaying a list of channels available for that zone. 75 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios Figure 16: Channel Selection Screen 3 Navigate to the parent folder by tapping on the left corner of the current folder name. Figure 17: Navigation in the Channel Selection Screen 4 Select a channel by tapping a channel of your choice. 8.5 Adding Favorite Talkgroups You can create a list of favorite talkgroups to facilitate contact with other users. Prerequisites: Ensure the Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is successfully paired with the LEX device. Procedure:
1 Start the Radio Services application. 2 In the Radio Services window, tap and select Edit favorites. 3 Tap 4 Tap + and add a talkgroup by performing one of the following actions:
Scroll through the list and select the check box next to the talkgroup you want to add to Favorites. 76 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios Search for a talkgroup by entering its name in the search field at the top of the screen and select the check box next to the talkgroup. 5 Return to the Radio Services main screen by tapping
. 8.6 Selecting Talkgroups You can change talkgroups within a zone by using the talkgroup rocker. For the exact location of the talkgroup rocker on the LEX device, see Device Overview on page 24. NOTICE: You cannot change zones with the talkgroup rocker. If you select a talkgroup added to a Favorites list, the rocker moves in the Favorites list and selects next/previous Favorite talkgroup. You receive a tone feedback on each press. When you reach the beginning or the end of a list of talkgroups, you receive a different tone feedback. NOTICE: If you cannot access this feature on your device, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 If you want to move to the next talkgroup, press and release the talkgroup rocker in the direction of the display. 2 If you want to move to a previous group, press and move the talkgroup rocker in the direction away from the display. 8.7 Sending PTT Audio You can follow this procedure to start and stop sending PTT audio on the LEX device. The LEX PTT button serves to send audio. When you press the LEX L11 PTT button, the LEX microphone is always used for communication. NOTICE: You can also send audio by pressing and holding the PTT button on the Land Mobile Radio (LMR). In that case, when the LEX device is paired with a TETRA radio and the LMR PTT button is pressed, the LEX microphone is used to send audio. When the LEX device is paired with an ASTRO radio and the LMR PTT button is pressed, the ASTRO microphone is used to transmit audio. Procedure:
On the LEX device, press and hold the PTT button. For the location of the PTT button on the LEX device, see Device Overview on page 24. The LEX device transmits audio as long as you press the PTT button. 8.8 Selecting Audio Routing Options The PTT audio can be routed to different sound outputs for the incoming and outgoing audio. You can select loudspeaker, headset, or earpiece to route audio. Prerequisites: Ensure that the Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is successfully paired with the LEX device. 77 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios NOTICE: The LEX loudspeaker is the default audio output. Procedure:
1 Start the Radio Services application. 2 Choose the way of audio routing:
NOTICE:
You can only select headset if the wired 3.5 mm headset is plugged in. You can only select earpiece if the wired 3.5 mm headset is not plugged in. If If you want to select loudspeaker, If you want to select a normal handheld speaker/earpiece, If you want to select headset,
. Then perform the following actions:
a Tap b Select perform the following actions:
a Tap
. b Select plug in the 3.5 mm jack of a wired headset. NOTICE: Unplugging the 3.5mm jack automatically selects the out-
put used before the headset was plugged in (loudspeaker or ear-
piece). 8.8.1 Adjusting Sound Volume You can perform this procedure to adjust radio sound settings on the LEX device. You can choose different audio routing options. You can also modify sound settings from the Land Mobile Radio (LMR). For more information, see the respective LMR user manual. Prerequisites: Ensure that your LMR radio is successfully paired with the LEX device. Procedure:
1 Adjust the sound volume by performing one of the following actions:
If If you want to adjust volume using the Volume button* on the device, Then perform the following actions:
If you want to increase volume, press the upper part of the Volume button. If you want to decrease volume, press the lower part of the Volume button. If you want to adjust sound volume in the Radio Services application, perform the following actions:
78 If Then MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios a From the Home screen, tap b In the Radio Services window, tap c Set the radio volume by adjusting the Ra-
. dio volume slidebar. Figure 18: Radio Volume Slidebar NOTICE: *See the Volume button in Device Overview on page 24. 8.9 Emergency Mode on LEX Device Paired with LMR When Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is paired with a LEX device and the Emergency button is pressed (on any device where LMR is present), the LEX device reacts based on what LMR channel the user is on and what Emergency Mode that channel is assigned. The LEX device initiates an emergency by pressing the emergency button on the LEX device. See Enabling Emergency Mode on page 80. The following types of Emergency Modes are available and are configurable by your technician:
Emergency Alert - A LEX device that is on a channel provisioned with this Emergency Mode sends an alert over the channel. Emergency Call - A LEX device on a channel provisioned with this Emergency Mode gives the user that pressed the Emergency button (the initiator) the top priority on the channel. Emergency Alert with LMR Emergency call - A LEX device that is on channel provisioned with this Emergency Mode sends an alert and give the user top priority on the channel. Silent Emergency Alert - A LEX device that is on a channel provisioned with this Emergency Mode silently sends an alert over the channel. When the LEX device is paired with an LMR radio and an emergency is activated, it is equivalent to pressing the LMR emergency button. If you are not paired with an LMR radio or the emergency fails
(for example out of range), you can use the PSX Cockpit application to switch between the PSX PTT app and LMR. See Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Radio for PTT Communications on page 72. For more details on emergency, see Emergency Services on page 80, and the WAVE 7000 Push-to-Talk for Mobile Devices manual. 79 MN005019A01-B Chapter 9: Emergency Services Chapter 9 Emergency Services This chapter describes emergency services available on the LEX L11 device. The LEX L11 allows you to enter emergency mode in a critical situation. You can also make emergency calls from the device. 9.1 Emergency Mode Alert Settings Emergency Mode indicates a critical situation, and triggers actions in applications, for example in Public Safety Experience (PSX) applications. The emergency alert signal overrides any other communication on the LEX device. NOTICE:
Contact your System Administrator to set up other emergency alert notifications if required. If no application supporting the emergency mode is installed, pushing the Emergency button does not trigger any actions. Initiate an emergency call only The following are examples of actions that can be triggered in applications that support the emergency mode when you press the Emergency button:
Send an SMS including your location Initiate a call and SMS NOTICE: For more information on the PSX Cockpit Emergency button, see the PSX User Guide. 9.1.1 Enabling Emergency Mode Emergency Mode indicates a critical situation. The emergency alert signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel of the radio. NOTICE: For information how to exit the emergency mode and what actions are triggered by pressing the Emergency button, contact your device administrator. Procedure:
Press and hold the Emergency button for more than three seconds. For the exact location of the Emergency button on the LEX device, see Device Overview on page 24. 9.2 Emergency Calls Emergency numbers are pre-programmed in your phone. They can vary by country and by the type of communication network. The pre-programmed emergency numbers may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. For additional information, contact your system administrator. 80 MN005019A01-B Chapter 9: Emergency Services If your phone has settings to disable Caller ID (by selecting Phone Settings Calls Additional settings Caller ID), be aware that disabling Caller ID prevents an the emergency operator from obtaining caller information needed to assist you. If you disable Caller ID for a specific call, you must enable it again immediately after that call. 9.2.1 Making Emergency Calls Procedure:
Make an emergency call on a LEX device by performing one of the following actions:
If If you need to make an emergency call on a locked LEX device, If you need to make an emergency call on an unlocked LEX device, Then perform the following actions:
On the locked device screen, tap EMER-
GENCY to display the dialer. Enter the emergency number (112 and 911 are always available). Tap to initiate the call. perform the following actions:
a On the Home screen, tap
. b Tap c Enter the emergency phone number. to display the dialer. d Tap to initiate the call. 9.3 Configuring Emergency Broadcast Alert Settings Configuring the emergency broadcast settings allows you to receive warnings about dangerous weather, missing people, or any threats to your life and/or health. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 From the Apps screen, tap 3 Select the check boxes next to the settings that you want to enable. 4 If you want to set an alert reminder, tap Alert reminder and, in the list, select a radio button next Sound Emergency broadcasts. to the setting of your choice. The following settings are available:
Once Every 2 minutes Every 15 minutes Off 81 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE Chapter 10 IMS VoLTE In this chapter, the term "IMS" is used to indicate IP Multimedia Subsystem, which is a type of communication network. You can ask your system administrator if that type of network is implemented on your phone. IMS supports voice, video, and conference calling, and a variety of other multimedia services. IMS voice calls use the standard Android dialer and Contacts application. Emergency calling is available (See Emergency Services on page 80). The following additional features might be enabled on your LEX device if it operates on an IMS network
(contact your system administrator for more information):
IMS Video Calls IMS Conference Calls IMS Voice Mail IMS Supplementary Services IMS Messaging (SMS and MMS) IMS Clear Tone - An optional IMS feature enabled by the agency to notify the user that they are on a clear call (non-secure). NOTICE: If your Organization must make calls in a secure (encrypted) environment, see Public Safety Experience (PSX) Applications on page 103. 10.1 Making IMS VoLTE Calls You can follow these steps to make a Voice over LTE (VoLTE) voice call. If your system supports VoLTE calling, users can make and receive calls to, and from other users, over an LTE IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 In the To field, type a name or phone number. As you enter text, matching contacts appear. Tap
. a contact from the contact list. User can also initiate calls to contacts from the following actions:
If... You want to call a contact, You want to call a contact in your favorites, You want to make a call with the dialer, Then... Tap Tap Tap
. 82 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 3 Tap to initiate the call. If... You want to turn on the speakerphone, You want to mute the call, 4 Tap to end the call. Then... Tap Tap
. 10.2 Making IMS Video Calls If your system supports VoLTE, users can make and receive video calls to, and from other users, over an LTE IMS network. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Prerequisites: If you are making video calls, user must enable the Video Calling setting. See Enabling IMS Video Calling on page 85. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 In the To field, type a name or phone number. As you enter text, matching contacts appear. User can also initiate calls to contacts from the following actions:
If... Then... You want to call a contact in your favorites, Tap Favorites
. You want to call a contact in your history list, Tap History
. You want to make a call with the dialer, You want to call a contact, 3 Tap to initiate the call. If... You want to turn on the speakerphone, You want to mute the call, Tap Tap Then... Tap Tap
. 83 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 4 Tap Video Call. The call is placed on hold. 5 From the Which type of call window, select a call type. NOTICE: While ViLTE call in progress, each user will see video on their respective device for full duplex video. In case of send only or receive only, the contact picture displays. Voice Only - Audio Only Video Transmit - Video Send only Video Receive - Video Receive only VT - Video send/receive 6 Tap to end the call. 10.2.1 Receiving IMS Video Calls If your private system supports VoLTE calls, users can receive a video call from another user. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Procedure:
1 When callee receives a video call, user swipes one of the following choices from the device screen:
Voice Only - Audio Only Video Transmit - Video Send only Video Receive - Video Receive only 84 VT - Video send/receive Figure 19: Receiving Video Call MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE NOTICE: While ViLTE call in progress, each user will see video on their respective device for full duplex video. In case of send only or receive only, the contact picture displays. 2 Tap to end the call. 10.2.2 Enabling IMS Video Calling You can use this procedure to configure Video Calling. If you are unable to configure Video Call settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Video Calling allows the user to send and receive Video Calls. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From the drop-down menu 3 Tap Turn on Video Calling to enable.
, select Settings Calls. 85 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.3 Making IMS Multi-Party Conference Calls You can use this procedure to create a conference phone session with up to three people on the LEX device. If your private system supports Voice over LTE (VoLTE) calls, you can make and receive conference calls to and from other users. If you are unable to use Multi-Party Conference calling, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 In the To field, type a name or phone number to add recipients. As you enter text, matching
. contacts appear. Tap from the contact list. You can also initiate calls to contacts from the following actions:
If... You want to call a contact, Then... tap
. You want to call a contact in your favorites, tap Favorites
. You want to call a contact in your history list, tap History
. You want to make a call with the dialer, tap
. 3 Tap to initiate the call. If... You want to turn on the speakerphone, You want to mute the call, Then... tap tap
. 4 When the call connects, tap 5 Add another recipient by performing steps in step 2. 6 Tap to initiate the call. When the call connects, the first call is placed on hold and the second call is active. 7 Tap 8 Tap to rotate between the individual calls. to create a conference call. Calls are rotated starting with the first call. This allows you to speak privately to one party. Tap to rotate to the next party. When the rotation is complete, you are placed back into conference mode and all calls are active. 86 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.4 IMS Voicemail This section provides information on VoiceMail Services where LEX device users can receive VoiceMail messages from other users that have connectivity to the operator. If you are unable to use VoiceMail services on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Voicemail is a method of storing voice messages electronically for later retrieval by intended recipients. Your system administrator enables voicemail services and configures the voicemail number. Users cannot change the assigned voicemail number on the LEX device. If VoiceMail is enabled, the user can configure settings in the LEX device that may affect the way VoiceMail will operate. NOTICE: When switching between networks, you LEX device phone number is not the same. Contact your system administrator for further details. You can initiate the following actions:
Leave a voicemail message. Retrieve a voicemail message. Select, play, and manage (create/modify greeting/delete messages). Receive a voicemail notification. Configure message sound and vibrate. See Enabling IMS VoiceMail Notification Sounds on page 87. Manage voicemail settings. See Enabling IMS Call Forwarding on page 89. IMPORTANT:
If you change the Call Forwarding setting on the LEX device to a number different from the voicemail number received from the device management, the calls will no longer route to the voicemail server. In some deployments, the voicemail number is not received from the device management. 10.4.1 Enabling IMS VoiceMail Notification Sounds You can use this procedure to configure VoiceMail notification sounds.VoiceMail allows you to send and receive voice messages with notification sounds. If you are unable to configure VoiceMail settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu 3 Complete the following actions:
, select Settings Calls VoiceMail. Tap Sound and select a notification sound. Tap Vibrate to enable vibration on received voicemail messages. 87 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.5 IMS Supplementary Services This section provides information on Supplementary Services over IMS for the LEX device on a private network. Supplementary services are available on IMS networks and provides the user with configurable device settings to manage calling capabilities on the LEX device. NOTICE: On some networks, this feature may be only partially available or not available at all. Contact your Agency Device Administrator for more information. All supplementary service configurations managed from the device are not saved on the server. If a LEX device requires a reset, the configured settings default to the system configuration. If unable to configure supplementary services on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. You may configure some of the following supplementary services on the LEX device:
NOTICE: Some of these supplementary services may not be available for all networks. Call Hold - During an active call, the LEX user can place the active call on hold. To configure call hold on your LEX device, see Placing IMS VoLTE Call on Hold on page 88. Communication Waiting - During an active call, if another caller calls your LEX device, the user has the option to Answer or Decline the incoming call. To configure Call Waiting on the LEX device, see Enabling IMS Call Waiting on page 89. Call Forwarding - User can forward incoming calls to the LEX device to a different number. To configure Call Forwarding on the LEX device, see Enabling IMS Call Forwarding on page 89 . Call Barring - User can prevent incoming, outgoing, or both types of calls from calling your phone. To configure Call Barring on the LEX device, see Enabling IMS Call Barring on page 90. Originating Identification Restriction (OIR), also known as Caller ID Restriction - User can withold their identity (ID) from being displayed to another LEX device when making a call over IMS, see Enabling and Disabling Caller ID in an IMS System on page 90. 10.5.1 Placing IMS VoLTE Call on Hold You can use this procedure to place an active IMS VoLTE call on hold. If you are unable to place calls on hold on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Procedure:
1 During an active call, tap the Hold 2 To resume the active call, tap the Hold icon again. icon to place the call on hold. NOTICE: The Hold button is not available during an Emergency call. 88 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.5.2 Enabling IMS Call Waiting You can use this procedure to enable or disable Call Waiting settings. If you are unable to configure call waiting on your LEX device, contact your system administrator. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu 3 Tap to enable Call Waiting.
, select Settings Calls Additional Settings. 10.5.3 Enabling IMS Call Forwarding You can follow this procedure to enable IMS Call Forwarding. Call Forwarding immediately redirects calls intended for your LEX device to another number. You can still make outgoing calls when this feature is turned on. If you turn off all Call Forwarding features, the device sets all conditional call forwarding to the voicemail number and the calls will route to the voicemail server. NOTICE:
This feature may not be available on all networks. If you are unable to configure Call Forwarding settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. The default call forwarding number is preconfigured to the voicemail number. If you change the Call Forwarding setting to a number different from the voicemail number received from the device management, the calls will no longer route to the voicemail server. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu 3 Enable the settings of your choice.
, select Settings Calls Call Forwarding Voice. The available settings are:
Table 16: Calling Accounts Setting Setting Always Forward Forward Implicitly Deactivate All Description All incoming calls are sent to the number you specify; your phone does not ring. This option overrides all other forwarding options. Calls are forwarded when you are on the phone. All call forwarding options are disabled. All calls are sent to the voicemail num-
ber. 89 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.5.4 Enabling IMS Call Barring You can use this procedure to configure Call Barring. Call Barring allows you to restrict certain types of incoming and outgoing calls from your LEX device. NOTICE:
Barring of only video or only audio is not supported. This feature may not be available on all networks. If you are unable to configure Call Barring settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu
, select Settings Calls Call Barring. You can configure the following settings:
Outgoing call barring Allows you to bar outgoing International and Roaming audio and video calls. Incoming call barring Allows you to bar incoming Roaming audio and video calls. 3 Configure the Outgoing call barring setting by performing the following actions:
a Tap Outgoing call barring and select one of the following options:
Off Outgoing call International roam call International call b In the Input Password window, enter call barring password and tap OK. 4 Configure the Incoming call barring setting by performing the following actions:
a Tap Incoming call barring, enter password, and select one of the following options:
Off Roaming All b In the Input Password window, enter call barring password and tap OK. 10.5.5 Enabling and Disabling Caller ID in an IMS System You can use this procedure to configure the Caller ID restriction on the LEX device. Origination Identifcation Restriction (OIR), also known as Caller ID restriction, allows you to restrict the user identity on outgoing calls to other callers directly from the LEX device. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. If you are unable to configure the Caller ID restriction settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 90 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 2 From drop-down menu 3 Tap Caller ID and tap to disable.
, select Settings Calls Additional Settings. 10.6 IMS Messaging If your system and LEX device support text messaging, users can make and receive text messages to, and from other users, over an LTE IMS network. If you are unable to text messages on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Prerequisites: Users can install messaging apps from the Google Play Store to use on the IMS network. If you are sending to multiple users, you must configure the Group Messaging setting before sending a text. See Enabling IMS Group Messaging on page 91. NOTICE:
For IMS messaging, you can use the Messaging app on the device. Multi-media messages (camera, recorded voice, images, and so on) are not supported in the IMS network. Procedure:
1 From Home or Apps screen, tap
. 2 In the bottom-right, tap 3 In the To field, type a name or phone number. As you enter text in the field, matching contacts
. appear. Tap the contact from the list. If Group Messaging is enabled, you can add a contact or multiple contacts by tapping Top Contacts. 4 Tap 5 Tap the Send message box and type a message. Messages are limited to 160 characters. When the limit is approached, a counter displays, above the Send icon, showing how many characters are left. If the limit is reached and the user keeps typing, a new message is created, which is joined with its predecessors when received. 6 Send a message by tapping
. 10.6.1 Enabling IMS Group Messaging You can follow this procedure to enable group messaging on the device. Access to the SMS and MMS settings are available through the Messaging settings on the device. Preference settings allow you to configure Notifications and Group Messaging options on the device. This option is turned off as a default. 91 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE NOTICE: MMS group messaging may not be available for all networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu 3 To enable SMS group messaging, tap Send an SMS reply to all recipients and get individual
, select Settings Advanced Group Messaging. replies (mass text). 4 To enable MMS group messaging, tap Send an MMS reply to all recipients (group MMS). 92 MN005019A01-B Applications Chapter 11 Applications This chapter contains information on applications available on the LEX L11 device. NOTICE: For information on applications available on your LEX device and application limitations related to specific networks your LEX device operates in, contact your Agency Device Administrator. 11.1 Applications Table 17: LEX L11 Applications Icon Description AirWatch Agent: allows to provision the device and perform ongoing management procedures. AirWatch Remote Management: allows you to connect to end-user devices in order to perform maintenace and troubleshooting procedures. Android System Webview: allows Android apps to display web content. Calculator : provides the basic and scientific arithmetic functions. Camera: use to take photos. Chrome: use to access Internet. Clock: use to set an alarm, stopwatch, or timer. Contacts: use to manage contact information. CRYPTR Manager: The CRYPTR micro en-
cryption card is used for voice encryption in fea-
tures such as data and phone over Virtual Pri-
vate Network (VPN) and Push-to-Talk (PTT) communication. Downloads: lists all downloaded files. File Manager: use to view and manage files. Gallery: use to view photos stored on the de-
vice. Gmail: use to send and receive emails. Google Calendar: use to manage events and appointments. 93 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications Icon 94 Description Google Drive: access to files anywhere through secure cloud storage and file backup for your photos, videos, files and more. Google Duo: use to make video calls. Google Keep: use to create, store, and catego-
rize notes, lists, reminders, images, audio, and many more. Google Maps: find local businesses, view maps and get driving directions. Google PDF viewer: use to view .pdf files. Google Play Movies & TV: buy or rent movies and TV shows. Google Play Services: updates Google appli-
cations. Google Photos: use to view photos stored on the device. Google Play Music: access music stored on the device. Google Play Store: Google app store for An-
droid devices with games, applications, movies, and more. Google Search: allows you to find what you need on the web and on your device. Google Street View: provides panoramic view of many streets in the world. Google TalkBack: helps vision-impaired users interact with their devices. Google Text-to-speech: reads the text on your screen aloud. Google Translate: online language translation service. Instantly translates text and web pages. Messages: send SMS and MMS messages. Phone: use to make phone calls. Radio Management Link Client (RM Link):
enables connecting the device to a remote host computer for staging, firmware installation, ap-
plication installation, and application removal by technical support. See the Radio Management Online Help for more information on the RM Ap-
plication. Settings: use Settings to configure the device. Icon MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications Description YouTube: you can use this app to view videos and music. 11.2 Camera This section provides information on taking photos and recording video files by using the Camera application available on your LEX device. 11.2.1 Taking Photos You can take photos in normal or panoramic mode. Procedure:
1 Open the Camera application. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
If If you want to take a picture in normal mode, If you want to take a picture in panoramic mode, Then perform the following actions:
a Open the mode selection bar located at the bottom-right corner of the screen by tapping Figure 20: Mode Selection Bar
. b Select c If you want to adjust camera settings, tap
. and select the settings of your choice. d Frame the subject on screen. e To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. The zoom controls appear on the screen. f Take a picture by tapping perform the following actions:
. 95 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications If Then a Open the mode selection bar located at the bottom-right corner of the screen by tapping Figure 21: Mode Selection Bar
. b Tap c Start capturing the picture from the left-
. most edge of the image and move to-
wards the rightmost edge. d Stop capturing by tapping
. 11.2.2 Recording Videos This section describes using the Camera application for recording video. Procedure:
1 Open the Camera application. 2 Open the mode selection bar located at the bottom-right side of the window by tapping
. Figure 22: Mode Selection Bar 3 Select
. 4 If you want to adjust video settings, tap and select the settings of your choice. 5 Start recording by tapping 6 To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. The zoom controls appear on the screen. 7 Finish recording by tapping
. 96 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 11.3 Gallery Gallery is used to manage your photos and videos. NOTICE: The device supports the following image formats: JPEG, GIF, PNG, and BMP. You can use Gallery to:
View photos. Play videos. Perform basic editing of photos. Set photos as a wallpaper. Set photos as a contact photo. Share photos and videos. The Gallery application is located at Apps screen Gallery contains all photos and videos stored on the microSD card and in the internal memory. 11.3.1 Albums Albums are groups of images and videos in folders. Photos and videos grouped together in an album are listed in a chronologically ordered grid. The name of the album displays at the top of the screen. 11.3.1.1 Sharing Albums Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap and hold an album until it becomes highlighted. 4 Tap
. Share applications are displayed. 5 Select the application that you want to use. 6 Follow the instructions within the selected application. 11.3.1.2 Checking Album Information Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap and hold an album until it becomes highlighted. 97 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications
. 4 Tap 5 Tap Details. 11.3.1.3 Deleting Albums Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the three horizontal lines in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap and hold an album until it becomes highlighted. 4 Tap 5 Delete the album by tapping OK. 11.3.2 Photos In the Gallery application, you may view, rotate, crop, share, and delete photos. 11.3.2.1 Viewing and Browsing Photos Procedure:
. 1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap an album of your choice. 4 Tap a photo. 5 To view the next or previous photo in the album, swipe left or right. 6 To view the photo in upright (portrait) or sideways (landscape) orientation, turn the LEX device. The photo is displayed (but not saved) in the new orientation. 7 View the controls by tapping the photo. 8 Zoom in by double-tapping the screen, or zoom in or out by pinching two fingers together or spreading them apart. 9 View parts that are not in view by dragging the photo. 11.3.2.2 Rotating Photos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to rotate. 4 View the controls by tapping the photo. 98 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 5 Open the editing view by tapping
. 6 Tap
. 7 Rotate the photo by tapping
. The photo rotates 90 clockwise. Each tap rotates the photo another 90. 8 Save the changes by tapping SAVE. 11.3.2.3 Cropping Photos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to crop. 4 View the controls by tapping the photo. 5 Edit the photo by tapping
. 6 Tap
. 7 Enter the cropping mode by tapping
. The cropping grid appears. 8 To crop the photo, perform one of the following actions:
If If you want to crop the photo manually, Then perform the following actions:
a Adjust the endpoints to select the portion of the photo to crop. If you want to choose automatic cropping dimensions,
. b Tap perform the following actions:
a Tap 1:1. b If you want to view the original photo, tap Original. c Confirm by tapping d Save changes by tapping SAVE. 11.3.2.4 Setting Photos as Contact Icons Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 99 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to set as a contact icon. 4 Tap the photo. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Set picture as. 7 Select Contact photo and select a contact of your choice. 8 Tap Crop picture. 9 Crop the photo accordingly as described in Cropping Photos on page 99. 10 Tap SAVE. 11.3.2.5 Sharing Photos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to share. 4 Tap the photo or photos of your choice. 5 Tap 6 Tap the application to use for sharing the selected photo. 11.3.2.6 Deleting Photos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to delete. 4 Tap the photo or photos of your choice. 5 Tap 6 Confirm by tapping OK. 11.3.3 Videos In the Gallery application, you can view videos saved on the microSD card and share videos. 11.3.3.1 Watching Videos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 100 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 3 Tap the album that contains the video you want to watch. 4 Tap the video you want to watch. 5 Tap 6 Select the application you want to use to watch the video. 7 To see the playback controls, tap the screen. Figure 23: Video Playback Controls 8 To return to the previous screen, double-tap
. 11.3.3.2 Sharing Videos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the video you want to share. 4 Tap the video. 5 Tap
. The Share via menu appears. 6 Tap the application you want to use to share the selected video and follow the on-screen instructions. 11.3.3.3 Deleting Videos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping
. 101 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the video you want to delete. 4 Tap the video. 5 Tap 6 Delete the video by tapping OK. 11.4 Turning On the Flashlight Procedure:
1 Open the Notifications panel by swiping the screen down from the Status bar. 2 Tap
. 11.5 Taking Screen Captures You can take screen captures of the currently displayed screen. Procedure:
Press the POWER BUTTON and the VOLUME DOWN button simultaneously. The screen capture is saved in the device memory. 11.6 Managing Downloads You can download, install, view your applications and media files, when your device is connected to the Internet through Wi-Fi or service provider network. You can download files from Google, or other sources, open, and edit them. Procedure:
1 Manage application downloads by tapping Downloads 2 From the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen, select the type of file you want to
. manage. 3 Open an item by tapping it. 4 If you want to share a downloaded item, tap and hold the selected item. a Tap b In the Share via menu, select the application you want use to share the downloaded item. 5 If you want to delete downloaded items, check items you want to delete and tap
. 102 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 11.7 Exploring Files You can use the File Manager application to navigate to folders/files, edit them, and create new ones. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap
. The main screen appears, displaying the storage available on your device. 3 Tap the folder you want to open. 4 To perform more actions in the File Manager application, tap the three dots in the bottom-left corner of the screen. The following options are available:
Properties the properties of a selected folder or file, for example type, size, modified date, and others. Refresh refreshes the application. New folder allows you to create a new folder. New file allows you to create a new file. Select all selects all folders and files. Deselect all deselects all folders and files. Add to bookmarks adds folders and/or files to the bookmarks. Add shortcut creates a shortcut to a selected folder or file. Set as home 11.8 Public Safety Experience (PSX) Applications The following PSX applications are available from Motorola Solutions, as part of an end-to-end solution that also includes servers to manage licensing, contacts, security, and settings:
NOTICE: To obtain the Public Safety Experience solution, contact Motorola Solutions Support. PSX Mapping A mapping application that integrates with PSX Messenger. Allows you to present devices on a map in near real time along with the location of those devices. It also allows performing additional actions, such as navigating to the selected user, or instantly starting a call. PSX Messenger A messaging application that integrates with PSX Home Screen and PSX Mapping. Allows you to send text messages to individuals and groups. You can attach photos, video and audio recordings, and maps showing your current location or another selected location. Taking photos, recording audio, viewing maps or using other applications is possible without closing the Messenger. PSX PTT Turns your LTE device into a multi-channel push-to-talk (PTT) handset for fully secure, real-time PTT voice communications anywhere you have a network connection. PSX Secure Calling Provides Secure Voice over IP (SVoIP) communication between individuals in an agency with option of deploying connectivity to an existing PBX. 103 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications PSX Cockpit PSX Cockpit mobile app client that bundles multiple Intelligent MiddleWare (IMW) functions for LTE devices. It is a central application that manages initial configuration, setting statuses, presence information, triggering emergency mode, clearing emergency mode, and other central functions for PSX applications. 104 MN005019A01-B Accessories Chapter 12 Accessories The LEX L11 device can be used with Motorola Solutions accessories. 12.1 Accessories This section lists supported accessories and their part numbers. NOTICE: To ensure regulatory compliance, you must use only Motorola Solutions approved, supplied, or replacement batteries and accessories. Carry Accessories Table 18: Carry Accessories Accessory Name Accessory kit, vehicular charger, with suction base LEX L11 Carry Case with Peter Jones Stud Part Number PMLN7912A PMLN7845A Chargers Table 19: Chargers (USB-C) Charger Type MSI in-box supplied travel charger MSI optional Quickcharge travel charger (with PD/QC4) MSI Multi-Unit Charger Part Number PS000150A31 US/JPN Plug PS000150A32 EU Plug PS000150A33 UK/HK Plug PS000150A34 AU/NZ Plug PS000150A35 ARG Plug PS000150A36 CHN Plug PS000150A37 KOR Plug PS000150A38 BZL Plug PS000278A01 US/JPN Plug PS000278A02 EU Plug PS000278A03 UK/HK Plug PS000278A04 AU/NZ Plug PS000278A05 ARG Plug PS000278A06 CHN Plug PS000278A07 KOR Plug PS000278A08 BZL Plug PMPN4341A EU Power Cord PMPN4342A UK/HK Power Cord PMPN4343A Aus/NZ Power Cord 105 MN005019A01-B Chapter 12: Accessories Charger Type Part Number MSI Desktop Charger PMPN4344A Argentina Power Cord PMPN4345A CHN Power Cord PMPN4346A KOR Power Cord PMPN4347A BZL Power Cord PMPN4348A JPN Power Cord PMPN4349A US Power Cord PMPN4351A EU Plug PMPN4352A UK/HK Plug PMPN4353A AU/NZ Plug PMPN4354A ARG Plug PMPN4355A CHN Plug PMPN4356A KOR Plug PMPN4357A BZL Plug PMPN4358A JPN Plug PMPN4359A US Plug MSI Vehicle Power Adapter (with PD) PMLN7779A Battery Capacity
(mAh) 2500mAh Battery Nominal Voltage
(V) 3.7V Battery Type Country of Origin Part Num-
ber LI-ION Malaysia 5000mAh 3.7V LI-ION Malaysia PMNN454 5 PMNN454 6 Batteries Table 20: Batteries Descrip-
tion Build-/
Vintage PRE-PI-
LOT PRE-PI-
LOT Standard battery
(STD) High-ca-
pacity bat-
tery (HI-
CAP) 106 MN005019A01-B Maintenance and Troubleshooting Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the device and provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during device operation. 13.1 Installing Firmware Updates You can follow this procedure to update the device firmware. Prerequisites:
Make sure your device has Internet connection. Perform this procedure once a system update becomes available for your device. Make sure the battery level is at least 50%. NOTICE:
To avoid high mobile data charges, connect your device to a Wi-Fi network. Once a system update is available, a System Update Available notification appears on the Notifications panel. Procedure:
1 From the Notifications panel, tap System Update Available. 2 Select Download. 3 In the Update new SW window, tap Download. When the download completes, the System Update Downloaded notification appears on the Notifications panel. 4 From the Notifications panel, tap System Update Downloaded and select Install. 5 In the Update new SW window, select Restart and install. 13.2 Maintaining LEX Device For trouble-free service, observe the following tips when using the LEX device:
Do not scratch or use a pen or a pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the screen. The touch-sensitive screen is made of polycarbonate. Do not to drop or subject the device to strong impact. Protect from extreme temperatures. Do not leave device on the dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heat sources. Do not store in any location that is dusty, damp, or wet. Use a soft lens cloth to clean the device. If the surface of the screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol. Periodically replace the rechargeable battery to ensure maximum battery life and product performance. Battery life depends on individual usage patterns. 107 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13.3 Battery Safety Guidelines Adhere to the following guidelines for battery safety:
The area where the units are charged should be clear of debris and combustible materials or chemicals. Follow battery usage, storage, and charging guidelines found in this guide. To charge the battery, the battery and charger temperatures must be between +32 F and +113 F Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard.
(0 C and +45 C) Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Use of an incompatible battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If you have any questions about the compatibility of a battery or a charger, contact Motorola Solution support. If charging through a USB port, the device shall only be connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the USB-IF compliance program. To enable authentication of an approved battery, as required by IEEE1725 clause 10.2.1, all batteries will carry a Motorola hologram. Do not fit any battery without checking it has the Motorola authentication hologram. Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture, or shred. Severe impact from dropping any battery-operated device on a hard surface could cause the battery to overheat. Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, or expose to fire, explosion, or other hazard. Do not leave or store the equipment in or near areas that might get very hot, such as in a parked vehicle or near a radiator or other heat source. Do not place battery into a microwave oven or dryer. Battery usage by children should be supervised. Follow local regulations to properly dispose of used rechargeable batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area with large amounts of water and seek medical advice. If you suspect damage to your equipment or battery, contact Motorola Solutions support to arrange for inspection. 13.4 Cleaning Guidelines This section includes cleaning guidelines for the LEX device. WARNING: Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the device and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines. CAUTION:
Always wear eye protection. Read the warning labels on compressed air and alcohol products before use. If you have to use any other solution for medical reasons, contact Motorola Solutions for more information. 108 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Approved Cleanser Active Ingredients 100% of the active ingredients in any cleaner must consist of one or a combination of the following:
isopropyl alcohol, or mild dish soap. Cleaning Instructions Do not apply liquids directly to the device. Dampen a soft cloth or use pre-moistened wipes. Do not wrap the device in the cloth or wipe, but gently wipe the unit Harmful Ingredients Many vinyl gloves contain phthalate additives, which are often not recommended for medical use and are known to be harmful to the housing of the device. The device should not be handled while wearing vinyl gloves containing phthalates, or before hands are washed to remove contaminant residue after gloves are removed. If products containing the harmful ingredients are used before handling the device, such as hand sanitizers containing ethanolamine, hands must be completely dry before handling the device to prevent damage to the plastics. Cleaning Materials Required Alcohol wipes Lens tissue Cotton-tipped applicators Can of compressed air with a tube Isopropyl alcohol Cleaning Frequency The cleaning frequency is up to your discretion due to the varied environments in which the mobile devices are used. They may be cleaned as frequently as required, but it is advisable to clean the camera window periodically when used in dirty environments to ensure optimum performance. 13.5 Cleaning LEX Device This section includes instructions on how the LEX device should be cleaned. Housing Using the alcohol wipes, wipe the housing including buttons. Display The display can be wiped down with the alcohol wipes, but care should be taken not to allow any pooling of liquid around the edges of the display. Immediately dry the display with a soft, non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking. Camera Window Wipe the camera window periodically with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses. 109 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13.6 Cleaning Interface Connector When and where to use: Use this procedure to clean the contacts of the interface connector on LEX device. Procedure:
1 Power off the device. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator along the contacts of the interface connector. Slowly move the applicator back-and-forth from one side of the connector to the other. 4 If grease and other dirt can be found on other areas of the cradle, remove using a lint-free cloth and alcohol. 5 Allow few minutes (depending on ambient temperature and humidity) for the alcohol to air dry before powering on the device. 13.7 Cleaning Battery Contacts When and where to use: Perform this procedure to clean the battery connectors. Procedure:
1 Remove the main battery from device. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Gently, rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the contacts. Do not leave any cotton residue on the contacts. 4 Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the contacts area. 5 Use a dry cotton-tipped applicator and repeat steps 4 and 5 at least three times. CAUTION: Do not point nozzle at yourself and others. Ensure that the nozzle or tube is away from your face. 6 Spray compressed air on the connector area by pointing the tube/nozzle about inch away from the surface. 7 Inspect the area for any grease or dirt, repeat if required. 13.8 Troubleshooting This section lists common problems and solutions to fix the problems. Table 21: Troubleshooting the LEX Series Device Solution Problem After pressing the Re-charge or replace the battery. Power button, does not turn on. Cause Battery is completely discharged. 110 Problem After pressing the Power button, the device does not turn on but a charge battery icon Appears. After connecting the device to a Ca-
ble, a battery charging icon Ap-
pears. When charging, the LED slowly blinks red. Battery did not charge. During data com-
munication with a host computer, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. Cause Battery not installed properly. Power button not held down long enough. Device not responding. Battery charge level is very low. Battery is de-
pleted but is charging. The device is at an ex-
tremely low-
power state. Battery failed. Device was removed from power while battery was charg-
ing. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Device re-
moved from USB cable or disconnected from host computer during com-
munication. Incorrect ca-
ble configura-
tion. MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Solution Install the battery properly. See Installing the Battery on page 29. Press the Power button until the Motorola Solutions splash screen is displayed. Reset the device. Re-charge or replace the battery. Press and hold the Power button to turn on. Charge the device for a few minutes. The LED changes to flashing green then press the Power button to turn on the device. If LED continuously blinks red, check power con-
nections. Disconnect and reconnect connections. Replace battery. If the device still does not operate, per-
form a hardware reset. Attach the device to in-box charger with in-box cable. The LEX device typically charges the standard battery up to 90% in about 1.5h in room temperature. NOTICE: Charge times vary by ambient temper-
ature. You can achieve better charging time by using the quick charger. Battery does not charge if ambient temperature is below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Reattach the communication cable and re-transmit. Contact technical support. 111 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem During data com-
munication over Wi-
Fi, no data trans-
mitted, or transmit-
ted data was in-
complete. During data com-
munication over Bluetooth, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. During data com-
munication over Public / Private, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. No sound. Device turns off. A message ap-
pears stating not enough storage memory. Device cannot find any Bluetooth devi-
ces nearby. 112 Cause Wi-Fi radio is not on. You moved out of range of an access point. Bluetooth ra-
dio is not on. You moved out of range of another Bluetooth de-
vice. You are in an area of poor cellular serv-
ice. VPN is not set up cor-
rectly. SIM card not installed properly. Data plan not activated. Volume set-
ting is low or turned off. Device is in-
active. Battery is de-
pleted. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Too many applications installed on the device. Too far from other Blue-
tooth devi-
ces. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) near-
Solution Turn on the Wi-Fi radio. Move closer to an access point. Turn on the Bluetooth radio. Move without 10 m (32.8 ft.) of the other device. Move into an area that has better service. Contact technical support for VPN setup information. Remove and re-install the SIM cards. Contact your service provider and ensure that your data plan is enabled. Adjust the volume. The display turns off after a period of inactivity. Set this pe-
riod to 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 minutes. Recharge or replace the battery. Move device to an area where the ambient temperature is between 0 C (32 F) and 45 C (113 F). Remove user-installed applications on the device to recov-
er memory. Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign, and tap and tap Uninstall. Move closer to the other Bluetooth device(s), within a range of 10 meters (32.8 feet). Apps. Select the unused programs Turn on the Bluetooth device(s) to find. MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Solution Set the Bluetooth device(s) to discoverable mode. If need-
ed, refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device (accesso-
ry) user manual. Clean the device screen with a piece of cloth, paying spe-
cial attention to the proximity sensor area. For more infor-
mation on cleaning the LEX display, see Cleaning LEX De-
vice on page 109. To check the exact location of the prox-
imity sensor on the LEX device, see Device Overview on page 24. Switch back to using the SIM card that allowed you to use the application. For more information, contact your network service provider. Problem The screen does not turn off when you hold the device close to your face during a call. An application does not work, even though it did before you switched the SIM cards. Cause by are not turned on. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) are not in discov-
erable mode. Dirty device screen im-
pairs the proximity sensor read-
ing. The settings of your cur-
rent SIM card do not allow to use the application. Table 22: For LEX Devices with Dual SIMs (Private Network and Public Network) Problem When the LEX device is in pri-
vate mode:
Calls and messages fail to phone numbers in a public network, or Cause Interconnection is not imple-
mented between private net-
work and public network. Calls and messages are not received from phone numbers in a public net-
work. When the LEX device is in pri-
vate mode:
Calls and messages are not received from phone numbers in a public net-
work. The caller might be using the public network phone number for the LEX. Solution If there is no connection be-
tween private network and public network in your system, then the LEX needs to be in public mode to call and an-
swer calls from a public net-
work. NOTICE: Emergen-
cy calling is availa-
ble when the LEX is in private mode, based on emergen-
cy settings in the pri-
vate SIM card. If there is no connection be-
tween private network and public network in your system, the LEX needs to be in public mode to answer calls to your public network number and to check voice mails for your public network phone number. If you prefer to keep the LEX in private mode, then you have the option of providing your private network phone number 113 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem Cause When the LEX device is in pri-
vate mode:
Messages and voice mails to your private network phone number are not re-
ceived. When the LEX device is in public mode:
Calls and messages fail to phone numbers in the pri-
vate network, or Calls and messages are not received from phone numbers in the private net-
work. When the LEX device is in public mode:
Calls and messages are not received from phone numbers in the private net-
work. SMS and voicemail are not im-
plemented in your private net-
work. Interconnection is not imple-
mented between private net-
work and public network. The caller might be using the private network phone number for the LEX. Solution to the caller, if allowed by your organization's policies. If SMS messages and voice-
mail are only available on the public network, callers must use your public network phone number to leave messages and voice mails. Also, the LEX must be in private mode to ac-
cess those messages and voice mails. If there is no connection be-
tween private network and public network in your system, then the LEX must be in pri-
vate mode to call, and to an-
swer calls from, the private network. If there is no connection be-
tween private network and public network in your system, the LEX must be in private mode to answer calls and messages to your private net-
work number and, if voice mail is enabled, to check voice mails for your private network phone number. If you prefer to keep the LEX in public mode, you have the option of provid-
ing your public network phone number to the caller. 13.9 Backing up Contacts with Android To back up contacts, the contacts must be exported to a .vcf file which must be copied to a secure location. Procedure:
. 1 On the Apps screen, tap 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen. 3 Select Settings. 4 Select Export. 5 Tap the triple-bar menu and select the location where you want to export the file with contacts. 114 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 6 In the text box, personalize the .vcf file name and tap 7 Tap SAVE. Postrequisites: Complete the contacts backup by following steps in Backing Up LEX Data Manually on page 115. 13.10 Backing Up LEX Data Manually Prerequisites: Make sure you have a USB type C cable to connect the device to a computer. Procedure:
1 Connect the device to a computer by using the supplied USB-C cable. The first time you connect the LEX device to a computer, device driver software is installed on the computer. When the Your device is ready to use message appears, you can proceed with the backup process. 2 From the Notifications panel on the device, tap the USB for... notification. 3 Tap Transfer files. 4 On the computer, click Start and select Computer. 5 Select the LEX L11 Portable Device. 6 Double-click Internal Shared Storage. 7 Navigate to the files that you want to back up. 8 Copy the files/folders to a secure location on your computer. 13.11 Syncing Data with Google Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 On the Apps screen, select Settings 3 Select Accounts. 4 Under the Accounts section, select the preferred email account. 5 Select the checkbox next to the application to be synced. If you want your data to be synced automatically, you can tap to the Auto-sync data option. and select the check box next 13.12 Backing Up Your Data and Settings with Android Backup Service You can use the Android Backup Service to back up data connected to one or more of your Google Accounts. If you had to replace your device or erase its data, you can restore your data using any account that you backed up. The following data and settings are backed up with the Android Backup Service:
Google Calendar settings 115 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Wi-Fi networks and passwords Home screen wallpapers Gmail settings Applications installed through Google Play (backed up on the Play Store application) Display settings (Brightness and Sleep) Language and Input settings Date and Time Third-party application settings and data (varies by application) Procedure:
1 On the Apps screen, tap 2 Tap Backup & reset. 3 Tap Back up my data and adjust the slider to the ON position. 13.13 Restoring Contact Data You can restore the backed-up information to your device. NOTICE: For restoring other user data, see Accessing Files from a Computer on page 42. Procedure:
. 1 On the Apps screen, tap 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen. 3 Select Settings. 4 Select Import. 5 In the Import contacts from pop-up window, tap .vcf file. 6 In the folder that opens, select the .vcf file with contacts. 13.14 Restoring Your Data and Settings You can choose to restore application settings when you reinstall an application on your device. This feature requires you to back up your data with your Google Account and that the application also uses the Android Backup Service. Some apps may not back up and restore all data. Procedure:
1 From the Apps screen, tap Settings. 2 Select Backup & reset. 3 Set the slidebar next to Automatic restore to the ON position. If you cannot modify the position of the slidebar, you must enable backing up data with Android backup service first. See Backing Up Your Data and Settings with Android Backup Service on page 115. 116 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13.15 Resetting the LEX Device You can use this procedure to reset the LEX device if it does not operate properly. Procedure:
1 Power off and on the device and verify if the problem is gone. The device restarts. If the problem remains, perform step 2. CAUTION: To avoid erasing important data from your device, do not press any of the buttons during power up. 2 Press the Power button and hold it for 10 seconds. The device restarts. 3 Remove the battery, reinsert it, and verify if the problem is gone. The device restarts. If the problem remains, contact technical support. 117 MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Appendix A Technical Specifications NOTICE: The specifications are subject to change. Table 23: Technical Specifications Item Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Durability Display Physical keys Operating temperature Storage temperature Hardware Processor Chipset Memory 118 Specification With standard battery: 152.5 x 78 x 13.2 mm
(6 x 3 x 0.5 in) With extended battery: 152.5 x 78 x 18.9 mm
(6 x 3 x 0.7 in) With standard battery: 260 g (9.8 oz) With extended battery: 310 g (10.9 Oz) Continues to work after multiple drops on ev-
ery face/edge/corner onto smooth concrete from a height of 120 cm (48 in). Screen size and pixels: 5 in (720 x 1280) Brightness: 500 nits Touch: capacitive touchpannel supporting multi-touch, latex glove Volume up and volume down button PTT button Emergency button Group rocker control (up/down) Power (on/off) button Two programmable buttons
-20C to +55C (-4F to 131F)
-46C to +85C (-50F to 185F) 2 x 4-core Qualcomm Kryo 260 CPU (1.82.2 GHz) Qualcomm Snapdragon 660 4 GB LPDDR4 SDRAM 64 GB eMMC Item Camera Flash Sensors Ports Battery Microphone Software Operating System Messaging Web Wide Area Networks Standards LTE release LTE bands MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Specification Rear 13MP Camera with Auto Focus Front 8MP Camera with Fixed Focus Rear camera LED Flash with torchlight func-
tionality Ambient Light Sensor Fingerprint Sensor Barometric Pressure Sensor Proximity/Gesture Sensor Accelerometer Sensor Magnetometer Sensor Gyro 3.5 mm Audio Jack (stereo) Two nano SIM slots One microSD slot (microSD, microSDHC, mi-
croSDXC, with capacity up to 400 GB) USB Type-C Standard 2500 mAh (nominal voltage of 3.7V) High capacity 5000 mAh (nominal voltage of 3.7V) Three microphones (primary, secondary, and tertiary) with noise and echo cancellation. Android Nougat 7.1 Google, Google Play, Android, and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc. SMS/MMS E-mail HTML5/WAP 2.0 compliant AOSP WebKit browser, Chrome browser FDD-LTE/TDD-LTE/GSM/UMTS/HSPA+
Includes LTE 3GPP Release 11 features, Category 9 Capable Europe, the Middle East and Africa (EMEA) LEX L11e: 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 38, 39, 40, including FDD-TDD mobility Asia-Pacific, Latin America (APAC-LA) LEX L11a: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 28 119 MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Item Specification NOTICE: Bands 2 and 4 are speci-
fied as roaming for the US. North America (NA), US AT&T/Firstnet/Verizon LEX L11n: 2, 4, 5, 7, 12, 14, 29, 30, 66, 13, 17, 25, 26, 41 2CA DL 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz UMTS/HSPA+: 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz IEEE Std 802.11-2012 a/b/g/n/ac/k/r with hot-
spot functionality (up to 32 connections) BT 4.2 LE (Low Energy) + BR/EDR Profiles:
Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Hands Free Profile (HFP) Headset Profile (HSP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Serial Port Profile (SPP) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Service Discovery Application Profile (SDAP) Dial-up Networking Profile (DUN) Generic Object Exchange Profile (GOEP) Object Push Profile (OPP) Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile
(GAVDP) Message Access Profile (MAP) Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) File Transfer Profile (FTP) Personal Area Networking Profile (PAN) Proximity Profile (PXP) Health Device Profile (HDP) SIM Access Profile (SAP) Generic Attribute (GATT) and attribute proto-
col (ATT) Supports the following NFC modes of opera-
tion:
Reader/Writer mode Peer-to-Peer mode Card Emulation mode UICC SE is supported for card emulation mode. GSM bands 3G/3.5G bands Wi-Fi Operating band Standards Personal Area Networks Bluetooth NFC 120 MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Item GPS Location services Device Management Remote management and configuration Video and Imaging Supported formats Specification Standalone GPS Assisted GPS (aGPS) GLONASS Supports AirWatch DM MPEG-4 (.mp4) JPG PNG GIF BMP H.264 H.263 NOTICE: Video and images are time stamped for evidence documentation. Audio Supported formats Output Input Accessories MP3 (.mp3) AMR AMR-NB AMR-WB AAC/AAC+/eAAC LPCM Dual Front Facing Speakers up to 1.6W 3.5 mm 4 pole Audio Jack (stereo) connector supporting:
COTS 3.5 mm Headset COTS 3.5 mm Headset with Microphone COTS 3.5 Headset with Microphone and Send/End button Motorola Solutions 3.5 mm Mono Headset with Microphone and PTT button Bluetooth power Class 2 output power 2.5 mW (4 dBm) Bluetooth Power Class 1.5 output power 10mW (10dBm) BLE 4&5 - output power 1mW (0dBm) Three noise and echo cancelling micro-
phones 121 MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Item In-box accessories Specification Either standard battery or high capacity bat-
tery with the appropriate battery cover USB-A to USB-C data/power cable Region-specific wall charger Quick Start Guide Regulatory/Safety Guide 122
various | Users Manual (Eng) rev2 | Users Manual | 5.32 MiB | / April 06 2018 |
Release 1.0 LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device User Guide JULY 2018 2018 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved MN005019A01-B MN005019A01-B Copyrights Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2018 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 2 MN005019A01-B Contact Us Contact Us Motorola Solutions Support Center The Solutions Support Center (SSC) is the primary contact for technical support included in your organization's service agreement with Motorola Solutions. Service agreement customers should be sure to call the SSC in all situations listed under Customer Responsibilities in their agreement, such as:
Before reloading software. To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before taking action. Your organization received support phone numbers and other contact information appropriate for your geographic region and service agreement. Use that contact information for the most efficient response. However, if needed, you can also find general support contact information on the Motorola Solutions website, by following these steps:
Enter motorolasolutions.com in your browser Ensure that your organization's country or region is displayed on the page. Clicking or tapping the name of the region provides a way to change it. Select "Support" on the motorolasolutions.com page. Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:
The document title and part number The page number or title of the section with the error A description of the error 3 MN005019A01-B Document History Document History Date May 2018 July 2018 Description Original release of the LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device User Guide Second release of the LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device User Guide The following sections were updated:
Regulatory Information on page 21 Accessories on page 105 Enabling Hearing Aid Compatibility on page 55 Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Ra-
Important Safety Information on page 20 dio for PTT Communications on page 72 Technical Specifications on page 118 Version MN005019A01-A MN005019A01-B 4 MN005019A01-B Contents Contents Copyrights................................................................................................................... 2 Contact Us................................................................................................................... 3 Document History....................................................................................................... 4 List of Figures............................................................................................................11 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 12 List of Processes...................................................................................................... 13 List of Procedures.....................................................................................................14 About This Manual.................................................................................................... 18 What is Covered in This Manual..................................................................................................18 Helpful Background Information.................................................................................................. 18 Related Information..................................................................................................................... 18 Important Safety Information....................................................................................................... 20 Service Information......................................................................................................................20 Regulatory Information................................................................................................................ 21 Versions.......................................................................................................................................23 Notational Conventions................................................................................................................23 Icon Conventions.........................................................................................................................23 Chapter 1: Getting Started........................................................................................24 1.1 Device Overview....................................................................................................................24 1.2 Package Contents................................................................................................................. 26 1.3 Setting Up the Device............................................................................................................ 27 1.3.1 Dual SIM Functionality............................................................................................. 27 1.3.2 Inserting SIM Cards................................................................................................. 27 1.3.2.1 Removing SIM Cards................................................................................. 28 1.3.3 Installing a MicroSD Card........................................................................................ 28 1.3.3.1 Removing a MicroSD Card........................................................................ 29 1.3.4 Installing the Battery................................................................................................ 29 1.3.4.1 Removing the Battery.................................................................................29 1.3.5 Attaching Battery Cover........................................................................................... 30 1.3.5.1 Removing the Battery Cover...................................................................... 30 1.3.6 Charging Information............................................................................................... 30 1.3.6.1 Battery Charge Indicators.......................................................................... 31 1.3.6.2 Turning On Battery Saving Mode...............................................................32 1.4 Powering On the Device for the First Time............................................................................32 1.5 Powering On..........................................................................................................................34 5 MN005019A01-B Contents 1.6 Powering Off..........................................................................................................................34 1.7 Battery Management............................................................................................................. 34 1.7.1 Battery Usage Monitor............................................................................................. 34 1.7.2 Low Battery Notification........................................................................................... 35 1.7.3 Battery Optimization.................................................................................................35 1.7.3.1 Entering Airplane Mode..............................................................................36 Chapter 2: Basic Functions......................................................................................37 2.1 Home Screen.........................................................................................................................37 2.2 Touchscreen Navigation........................................................................................................38 2.3 On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................................................................39 2.3.1 Google Keyboard Settings....................................................................................... 39 2.3.2 Google Voice Typing................................................................................................40 2.3.2.1 Adjusting Google Voice Typing Settings.................................................... 40 2.4 Status Bar Icons.................................................................................................................... 41 2.5 Switching to Multiple Active Windows View...........................................................................41 2.6 Accessing Files from a Computer..........................................................................................42 Chapter 3: Device Settings.......................................................................................43 3.1 Covert Mode.......................................................................................................................... 43 3.1.1 Turning On Covert Mode......................................................................................... 43 3.1.2 Turning Off Covert Mode......................................................................................... 44 3.1.3 Configuring Covert Mode......................................................................................... 44 3.2 Setting Programmable Buttons..............................................................................................44 3.3 LEX Series Screen Lock........................................................................................................45 3.3.1 Selecting a Locking Option...................................................................................... 45 3.3.2 Setting Timeout for Locking..................................................................................... 47 3.3.3 Device Unlock.......................................................................................................... 47 3.3.3.1 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern................................................47 3.3.3.2 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password................................ 47 3.3.3.3 Setting Unlock with Fingerprint.................................................................. 48 3.3.4 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device....................................................... 49 3.4 Setting Date and Time...........................................................................................................50 3.5 Setting the Display.................................................................................................................50 3.5.1 Setting Screen Brightness Level..............................................................................50 3.5.2 Setting Adaptive Brightness.....................................................................................51 3.5.3 Changing Wallpapers...............................................................................................51 3.5.4 Setting Up Sleep Mode............................................................................................ 51 3.5.5 Setting Up Screen Saver......................................................................................... 51 3.5.6 Setting Font Size......................................................................................................51 3.5.7 Setting Display Size................................................................................................. 52 6 MN005019A01-B Contents 3.5.8 Setting Screen Rotation........................................................................................... 52 3.5.9 Enabling Cast Screen.............................................................................................. 52 3.6 Sound Settings...................................................................................................................... 52 3.6.1 Adjusting Sound Settings.........................................................................................52 3.6.2 Enabling Howling Suppression................................................................................ 53 3.6.2.1 Disabling Howling Suppression..................................................................53 3.6.3 Setting Up Do Not Disturb........................................................................................54 3.6.3.1 Setting Automatic Rules.............................................................................54 3.6.4 Enabling Hearing Aid Compatibility..........................................................................55 3.6.4.1 Disabling Hearing Aid Compatibility........................................................... 56 Chapter 4: Wireless...................................................................................................57 4.1 Bluetooth Profiles...................................................................................................................57 4.2 Bluetooth Power States......................................................................................................... 58 4.3 Enabling Bluetooth.................................................................................................................58 4.4 Disabling Bluetooth................................................................................................................59 4.5 Renaming the Device............................................................................................................ 59 4.6 Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices...................................................................................... 59 4.6.1 Managing Bluetooth Devices................................................................................... 59 4.7 Connecting to Wi-Fi Networks............................................................................................... 60 Adding New Networks.......................................................................................................60 Editing Networks............................................................................................................... 60 Forgetting Networks..........................................................................................................60 4.8 Configuring Wi-Fi Hotspots....................................................................................................61 4.9 Setting Up USB Tethering..................................................................................................... 62 4.10 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering..........................................................................................62 4.11 Near-Field Communication.................................................................................................. 62 4.11.1 Turning NFC On.....................................................................................................63 4.11.2 Turning NFC Off.....................................................................................................63 Chapter 5: Contacts.................................................................................................. 64 5.1 Adding New Contacts............................................................................................................ 64 5.2 Editing Contact Details.......................................................................................................... 64 5.3 Searching Contacts............................................................................................................... 64 5.4 Sharing Contacts................................................................................................................... 65 Chapter 6: Calling......................................................................................................66 6.1 Making Calls.......................................................................................................................... 66 6.1.1 Setting Up Speed Dial..............................................................................................67 6.2 Making Conference Calls.......................................................................................................67 6.3 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset............................................................................ 68 6.4 Call Settings...........................................................................................................................69 7 MN005019A01-B Contents Chapter 7: Messaging...............................................................................................70 7.1 Sending Messages................................................................................................................ 70 Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios............................................................ 72 8.1 Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Radio for PTT Communications...................... 72 8.2 Pairing Radio with the LEX Device ....................................................................................... 74 8.3 Unpairing Radio from the LEX Device................................................................................... 75 8.4 Selecting Zones and Channels..............................................................................................75 8.5 Adding Favorite Talkgroups...................................................................................................76 8.6 Selecting Talkgroups............................................................................................................. 77 8.7 Sending PTT Audio................................................................................................................77 8.8 Selecting Audio Routing Options........................................................................................... 77 8.8.1 Adjusting Sound Volume..........................................................................................78 8.9 Emergency Mode on LEX Device Paired with LMR.............................................................. 79 Chapter 9: Emergency Services.............................................................................. 80 9.1 Emergency Mode Alert Settings............................................................................................ 80 9.1.1 Enabling Emergency Mode......................................................................................80 9.2 Emergency Calls....................................................................................................................80 9.2.1 Making Emergency Calls......................................................................................... 81 9.3 Configuring Emergency Broadcast Alert Settings..................................................................81 Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE.............................................................................................82 10.1 Making IMS VoLTE Calls.....................................................................................................82 10.2 Making IMS Video Calls.......................................................................................................83 10.2.1 Receiving IMS Video Calls.....................................................................................84 10.2.2 Enabling IMS Video Calling .................................................................................. 85 10.3 Making IMS Multi-Party Conference Calls........................................................................... 86 10.4 IMS Voicemail......................................................................................................................87 10.4.1 Enabling IMS VoiceMail Notification Sounds ........................................................ 87 10.5 IMS Supplementary Services.............................................................................................. 88 10.5.1 Placing IMS VoLTE Call on Hold .......................................................................... 88 10.5.2 Enabling IMS Call Waiting..................................................................................... 89 10.5.3 Enabling IMS Call Forwarding............................................................................... 89 10.5.4 Enabling IMS Call Barring......................................................................................90 10.5.5 Enabling and Disabling Caller ID in an IMS System.............................................. 90 10.6 IMS Messaging.................................................................................................................... 91 10.6.1 Enabling IMS Group Messaging ........................................................................... 91 Chapter 11: Applications..........................................................................................93 11.1 Applications......................................................................................................................... 93 11.2 Camera................................................................................................................................95 11.2.1 Taking Photos........................................................................................................ 95 8 MN005019A01-B Contents 11.2.2 Recording Videos...................................................................................................96 11.3 Gallery................................................................................................................................. 97 11.3.1 Albums................................................................................................................... 97 11.3.1.1 Sharing Albums........................................................................................97 11.3.1.2 Checking Album Information.................................................................... 97 11.3.1.3 Deleting Albums....................................................................................... 98 11.3.2 Photos....................................................................................................................98 11.3.2.1 Viewing and Browsing Photos..................................................................98 11.3.2.2 Rotating Photos........................................................................................98 11.3.2.3 Cropping Photos...................................................................................... 99 11.3.2.4 Setting Photos as Contact Icons.............................................................. 99 11.3.2.5 Sharing Photos.......................................................................................100 11.3.2.6 Deleting Photos......................................................................................100 11.3.3 Videos..................................................................................................................100 11.3.3.1 Watching Videos.................................................................................... 100 11.3.3.2 Sharing Videos.......................................................................................101 11.3.3.3 Deleting Videos...................................................................................... 101 11.4 Turning On the Flashlight.................................................................................................. 102 11.5 Taking Screen Captures.................................................................................................... 102 11.6 Managing Downloads........................................................................................................ 102 11.7 Exploring Files................................................................................................................... 103 11.8 Public Safety Experience (PSX) Applications....................................................................103 Chapter 12: Accessories........................................................................................ 105 12.1 Accessories....................................................................................................................... 105 Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting...................................................107 13.1 Installing Firmware Updates.............................................................................................. 107 13.2 Maintaining LEX Device ....................................................................................................107 13.3 Battery Safety Guidelines.................................................................................................. 108 13.4 Cleaning Guidelines...........................................................................................................108 13.5 Cleaning LEX Device.........................................................................................................109 13.6 Cleaning Interface Connector............................................................................................110 13.7 Cleaning Battery Contacts................................................................................................. 110 13.8 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................110 13.9 Backing up Contacts with Android..................................................................................... 114 13.10 Backing Up LEX Data Manually.......................................................................................115 13.11 Syncing Data with Google............................................................................................... 115 13.12 Backing Up Your Data and Settings with Android Backup Service................................. 115 13.13 Restoring Contact Data................................................................................................... 116 13.14 Restoring Your Data and Settings................................................................................... 116 9 MN005019A01-B Contents 13.15 Resetting the LEX Device................................................................................................117 Appendix A: Technical Specifications.................................................................. 118 10 MN005019A01-B List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1: LEX L11 Overview...................................................................................................................24 Figure 2: LEX L11 Top........................................................................................................................... 25 Figure 3: LEX L11 Side Buttons Overview............................................................................................. 26 Figure 4: LEX L11 SIM Card Tray.......................................................................................................... 27 Figure 5: MicroSD Card Insertion........................................................................................................... 28 Figure 6: Battery Cover Removal Slot.................................................................................................... 30 Figure 7: LEX L11 Welcome Screen...................................................................................................... 33 Figure 8: Battery Screen.........................................................................................................................35 Figure 9: LEX L11 Home Screen Overview............................................................................................37 Figure 10: Notifications Panel.................................................................................................................42 Figure 11: Set up WLAN Hotspot Dialog Box.........................................................................................61 Figure 12: PSX Cockpit Sidebar Menu...................................................................................................73 Figure 13: Push to Talk Screen..............................................................................................................73 Figure 14: Secure Pairing Screen.......................................................................................................... 74 Figure 15: Radio Services Overflow Menu............................................................................................. 75 Figure 16: Channel Selection Screen.....................................................................................................76 Figure 17: Navigation in the Channel Selection Screen.........................................................................76 Figure 18: Radio Volume Slidebar..........................................................................................................79 Figure 19: Receiving Video Call............................................................................................................. 85 Figure 20: Mode Selection Bar...............................................................................................................95 Figure 21: Mode Selection Bar...............................................................................................................96 Figure 22: Mode Selection Bar...............................................................................................................96 Figure 23: Video Playback Controls..................................................................................................... 101 11 MN005019A01-B List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: Motorola Documentation.......................................................................................................... 19 Table 2: Motorola Solutions Accessories and Energy Documentation...................................................20 Table 3: LEX L11 Back and Front.......................................................................................................... 24 Table 4: LEX L11 Top.............................................................................................................................25 Table 5: LEX L11 Side Buttons.............................................................................................................. 26 Table 6: LEX L11 Notification LEDs....................................................................................................... 31 Table 7: LEX L11 Home Screen.............................................................................................................37 Table 8: On-Screen Navigation Buttons.................................................................................................38 Table 9: Touchscreen Actions................................................................................................................38 Table 10: Google Keyboard Settings......................................................................................................39 Table 11: Status Bar Icons..................................................................................................................... 41 Table 12: Bluetooth Profiles................................................................................................................... 57 Table 13: Message Media Type............................................................................................................. 70 Table 14: ASTRO (APX) Radios Supported by LEX L11....................................................................... 72 Table 15: TETRA Radios Supported by LEX L11.................................................................................. 72 Table 16: Calling Accounts Setting.........................................................................................................89 Table 17: LEX L11 Applications............................................................................................................. 93 Table 18: Carry Accessories................................................................................................................ 105 Table 19: Chargers (USB-C)................................................................................................................ 105 Table 20: Batteries............................................................................................................................... 106 Table 21: Troubleshooting the LEX Series Device...............................................................................110 Table 22: For LEX Devices with Dual SIMs (Private Network and Public Network).............................113 Table 23: Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................118 12 MN005019A01-B List of Processes List of Processes Setting Up the Device ............................................................................................................................27 13 MN005019A01-B List of Procedures List of Procedures Inserting SIM Cards ...............................................................................................................................27 Removing SIM Cards ............................................................................................................................ 28 Installing a MicroSD Card ......................................................................................................................28 Removing a MicroSD Card ....................................................................................................................29 Installing the Battery ..............................................................................................................................29 Removing the Battery ............................................................................................................................29 Attaching Battery Cover .........................................................................................................................30 Removing the Battery Cover ................................................................................................................. 30 Turning On Battery Saving Mode .......................................................................................................... 32 Powering On the Device for the First Time ............................................................................................32 Powering On ..........................................................................................................................................34 Powering Off ..........................................................................................................................................34 Entering Airplane Mode .........................................................................................................................36 Google Voice Typing ............................................................................................................................. 40 Adjusting Google Voice Typing Settings ............................................................................................... 40 Switching to Multiple Active Windows View ...........................................................................................41 Accessing Files from a Computer ..........................................................................................................42 Turning On Covert Mode .......................................................................................................................43 Turning Off Covert Mode .......................................................................................................................44 Configuring Covert Mode .......................................................................................................................44 Setting Programmable Buttons ..............................................................................................................44 Selecting a Locking Option ....................................................................................................................45 Setting Timeout for Locking ...................................................................................................................47 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern ........................................................................................... 47 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password ............................................................................47 Setting Unlock with Fingerprint ..............................................................................................................48 Unlocking the Device by Using the Fingerprint Sensor ......................................................................... 49 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device .....................................................................................49 Setting Date and Time ...........................................................................................................................50 Setting Screen Brightness Level ........................................................................................................... 50 Setting Adaptive Brightness .................................................................................................................. 51 Changing Wallpapers ............................................................................................................................ 51 Setting Up Sleep Mode ..........................................................................................................................51 Setting Up Screen Saver .......................................................................................................................51 Setting Font Size ................................................................................................................................... 51 Setting Display Size ...............................................................................................................................52 14 MN005019A01-B List of Procedures Setting Screen Rotation .........................................................................................................................52 Enabling Cast Screen ............................................................................................................................52 Adjusting Sound Settings ...................................................................................................................... 52 Enabling Howling Suppression ..............................................................................................................53 Disabling Howling Suppression .............................................................................................................53 Setting Up Do Not Disturb ..................................................................................................................... 54 Setting Automatic Rules ........................................................................................................................ 54 Enabling Hearing Aid Compatibility ....................................................................................................... 55 Disabling Hearing Aid Compatibility ...................................................................................................... 56 Enabling Bluetooth ................................................................................................................................ 58 Disabling Bluetooth ................................................................................................................................59 Renaming the Device ............................................................................................................................ 59 Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices ...................................................................................................... 59 Managing Bluetooth Devices .................................................................................................................59 Connecting to Wi-Fi Networks ............................................................................................................... 60 Adding New Networks ........................................................................................................................... 60 Editing Networks ....................................................................................................................................60 Forgetting Networks .............................................................................................................................. 60 Configuring Wi-Fi Hotspots ....................................................................................................................61 Setting Up USB Tethering ..................................................................................................................... 62 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering ............................................................................................................62 Turning NFC On .................................................................................................................................... 63 Turning NFC Off .................................................................................................................................... 63 Adding New Contacts ............................................................................................................................64 Editing Contact Details .......................................................................................................................... 64 Searching Contacts ............................................................................................................................... 64 Sharing Contacts ...................................................................................................................................65 Making Calls ..........................................................................................................................................66 Setting Up Speed Dial ........................................................................................................................... 67 Making Conference Calls ...................................................................................................................... 67 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset ............................................................................................68 Sending Messages ................................................................................................................................70 Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Radio for PTT Communications ...................................... 72 Pairing Radio with the LEX Device ........................................................................................................74 Unpairing Radio from the LEX Device ...................................................................................................75 Selecting Zones and Channels ..............................................................................................................75 Adding Favorite Talkgroups ...................................................................................................................76 Selecting Talkgroups .............................................................................................................................77 Sending PTT Audio ............................................................................................................................... 77 15 MN005019A01-B List of Procedures Selecting Audio Routing Options ...........................................................................................................77 Adjusting Sound Volume ....................................................................................................................... 78 Enabling Emergency Mode ................................................................................................................... 80 Making Emergency Calls .......................................................................................................................81 Configuring Emergency Broadcast Alert Settings ................................................................................. 81 Making IMS VoLTE Calls .......................................................................................................................82 Making IMS Video Calls ........................................................................................................................ 83 Receiving IMS Video Calls .................................................................................................................... 84 Enabling IMS Video Calling ...................................................................................................................85 Making IMS Multi-Party Conference Calls .............................................................................................86 Enabling IMS VoiceMail Notification Sounds .........................................................................................87 Placing IMS VoLTE Call on Hold ...........................................................................................................88 Enabling IMS Call Waiting .....................................................................................................................89 Enabling IMS Call Forwarding ...............................................................................................................89 Enabling IMS Call Barring ..................................................................................................................... 90 Enabling and Disabling Caller ID in an IMS System ..............................................................................90 IMS Messaging ......................................................................................................................................91 Enabling IMS Group Messaging ............................................................................................................91 Taking Photos ........................................................................................................................................95 Recording Videos .................................................................................................................................. 96 Sharing Albums ..................................................................................................................................... 97 Checking Album Information ................................................................................................................. 97 Deleting Albums .................................................................................................................................... 98 Viewing and Browsing Photos ...............................................................................................................98 Rotating Photos .....................................................................................................................................98 Cropping Photos ....................................................................................................................................99 Setting Photos as Contact Icons ........................................................................................................... 99 Sharing Photos ....................................................................................................................................100 Deleting Photos ................................................................................................................................... 100 Watching Videos ..................................................................................................................................100 Sharing Videos .................................................................................................................................... 101 Deleting Videos ................................................................................................................................... 101 Turning On the Flashlight .................................................................................................................... 102 Taking Screen Captures ......................................................................................................................102 Managing Downloads ..........................................................................................................................102 Exploring Files .....................................................................................................................................103 Installing Firmware Updates ................................................................................................................ 107 Cleaning Interface Connector ..............................................................................................................110 Cleaning Battery Contacts ...................................................................................................................110 16 MN005019A01-B List of Procedures Backing up Contacts with Android .......................................................................................................114 Backing Up LEX Data Manually .......................................................................................................... 115 Syncing Data with Google ................................................................................................................... 115 Backing Up Your Data and Settings with Android Backup Service ..................................................... 115 Restoring Contact Data ....................................................................................................................... 116 Restoring Your Data and Settings .......................................................................................................116 Resetting the LEX Device ....................................................................................................................117 17 MN005019A01-B About This Manual About This Manual This guide provides information about using the LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device, its basic Android features, and features added by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions features include a Radio Services application for collaboration with supported Land Mobile Radio (LMR) models, such as ASTRO 25 APX and TETRA MTP radios. Screens and menu options may be changed or customized by your agency to show different information. What is Covered in This Manual This manual contains the following chapters:
Getting Started on page 24 explains getting the LEX device up and running for the first time. Basic Functions on page 37 describes basic functions of the LEX device, such as touchscreen navigation, on-screen keyboard settings, and others. Device Settings on page 43 describes the settings available on the device. Wireless on page 57 explains configuring the device to operate in wireless networks. Contacts on page 64 covers the Contacts application. Calling on page 66 describes using the Phone application, for example making calls, conference calls, and others. Messaging on page 70 covers sending text and multimedia messages. Collaboration with LMR Radios on page 72 is a reference to connecting the LEX device to a Land Mobile Radio for communicating on LTE, TETRA, and ASTRO systems. Emergency Services on page 80 explains emergency functions of the device. IMS VoLTE on page 82 covers communication in the IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem
(IMS), if present in your phone's network. Applications on page 93 describes applications available for the LEX device. Accessories on page 105 provides information on accessories compatible with the LEX L11 device. Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 107 provides solutions to most common problems related to the LEX device. Technical Specifications on page 118 contains technical details of the LEX device. Helpful Background Information Motorola Solutions offers various courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For more information on current course offerings and technology paths, visit http://
www.motorolasolutions.com/training. Related Information It is recommended that you obtain access to the following documentation. Unless otherwise specified, the Motorola Solutions documents listed here are available to users with a login account at https://learning.motorolasolutions.com. You can search for LEX device manuals by entering LEX in the Search Catalog field. 18 MN005019A01-B About This Manual You can also access the manuals on the device by tapping LEX Docs You are redirected to the Motorola Solutions learning portal, where you can download the LEX manuals and view them. For information on warranty terms, see the Support page at https://www.motorolasolutions.com. For instructions on accessing the appropriate Support page for your region, see Contact Us on page 3. on the device home screen. Table 1: Motorola Documentation Related Information LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device Quick Start Guide RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mission Critical Devices LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device Service Provisioning and Management Guide WAVE 7000 PSX Push-to-Talk for Mobile Devi-
ces manual WAVE Mobile Communicator PTT User Guide Tutorial for Motorola Solutions carrier-based Push-To-Talk app, such as Enhanced Push-To-
Talk for Android from AT&T. PSX User Guide PSX Secure Calling User Guide Purpose Provides initial tasks for the physical setup of the LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device, in-
cluding SIM card and battery installation, and charging using the USB-C cable. NOTICE: For information about charger accessories available from Motorola Solutions, contact your de-
vice technician or device administra-
tor. Describes how to safely use mission critical de-
vices. Provides field technician with instructions for ac-
tivating LEX L11 devices on the broadband net-
work with the configuration required by their users and organization. Describes how to use the PTT application that offers services over 4G, 3G, or WiFi network. Provides instructions for installing, configuring, and operating the WAVE Mobile Communicator on Android and iOS devices, for use in a WAVE 5000 Management Server domain or www.waveoncloud.com. Browser-based tutorial is accessible from the user interface of the Android PTT application, under Settings. For additional information, con-
tact your service provider. This manual provides basic operation proce-
dures for PSX mobile application suite (dedicat-
ed chapters for Cockpit, Mapping, and Messen-
ger), including necessary operator and system context. Provides information about the Private Teleph-
ony Solution PSX Secure Calling client for Voice Over IP (VoIP) services available from Motorola Solutions for its Public Safety LTE systems. 19 MN005019A01-B About This Manual Table 2: Motorola Solutions Accessories and Energy Documentation Document MN004688A01 LEX L11 Holster User Manual MN004687A01 LEX L11 Cradle Quick Start Guide MN003440A01 LEX L11 Multi Unit Charger User Manual MN003922A01 LEX L11 Multi Unit Charger Safety Leaflet MN004263A01 LEX L11 IMPRES 2 Adaptive Unit Charger User Guide MN004594A01 LEX L11 IMPRES 2 Dual Or Single Unit Chargers Safety Leaflet Purpose A user guide that describes how to use the hol-
ster. A quick start guide that describes how to start using the LEX L11 cradle in no time. A user guide that describes how to use the Mul-
ti-Unit Charger. A safety information leaflet that describes LEX L11 Charger Kits. A user manual that describes how to use the IMPRES 2 Adaptive Unit Charger. A safety leaflet that describes the IMPRES 2 Dual Or Single Unit Chargers. Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mission Critical Devices. NOTICE:
ATTENTION! This mission critical device is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the mission critical device, read the RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mission Critical Devices manual which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. This equipment is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. For body worn operation, this device has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guideline for use with a Motorola Solutions, Inc. approved accessories sold with this device. Use of non-Motorola-approved body worn or battery accessories may exceed the applicable RF exposure guidelines (iEEE, ICNIRP or FCC). Service Information If you have a problem with your device, you can contact Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center for your region. Contact information is available at: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/support. You can also call 1-800-323-9949 for support and select option 6 for PS LTE infrastructure and devices. When contacting support, have the following information available:
Serial number of the unit (found on manufacturing label) Model number or product name (found on manufacturing label) Software type and version number If returning the device to Motorola Solutions for repair service, please ensure the following items have been completed prior to shipping the device:
Perform complete backup of device, including personal data and contact information Remove SIM card(s) from device If applicable, remove SD memory card from device If applicable, remove CRYPTR micro SD card from device 20 MN005019A01-B About This Manual Erase/wipe all personal and/or confidential data from device Please return the damaged device, only. Accessories, such as the battery, battery cover, charging cable, holster, etc., should NOT be included with the device when it is returned. Regulatory Information LEX L11 regulatory labels are located at Settings About phone Regulatory labels. NOTICE: If you cannot access regulatory labels in Settings, you can locate physical regulatory labels in the LEX L11 battery compartment. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following three conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (3) Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions may void the user's authority to operate this device. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and complies with Canadian ICES-003. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For Canada: Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. This device meets all the other requirements specified in Part 15E, Section 15.407 of the FCC Rules. Wireless Device Country Approvals Regulatory markings, subject to certification, are applied to the device signifying that the radio(s) is/are approved for use in the US. Operation of the device without regulatory approval is illegal. FOR COUNTRY CODE SELECTION USAGE (WLAN DEVICES) NOTICE: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. 21 MN005019A01-B About This Manual Industry Canada WLAN statement CAUTION:
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit;
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-
to-point operation as appropriate; and
(iv) the worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.2(3) shall be clearly indicated.
(v) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Use with Hearing Aids This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone. To determine the compatibility of a WD and a particular hearing aid, simply add the numerical part of the hearing aid category (e.g. M2/T2=2) with the numerical part of the WD emission rating (e.g., M3=3) to arrive at the system classification for this particular combination of WD and hearing aid. A sum of 5 would indicate that the WD and hearing aid would provide normal use, and a sum of 6 or greater would indicate that the WD and hearing aid would provide excellent performance. A category sum of less than 4 would likely result in a performance that is judged unacceptable by the hearing aid user. WHAT IS HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY?
The Federal Communications Commission has implemented rules and a rating system designed to enable people who wear hearing aids to more effectively use these wireless telecommunications devices. The standard for compatibility of digital wireless phones with hearing aids is set forth in American National Standard Institute (ANSI) standard C63.19. There are two sets of ANSI standards with ratings from one to four (four being the best rating): an M rating for reduced interference making it easier to hear conversations on the phone when using the hearing aid microphone, and a T rating that enables the phone to be used with hearing aids operating in the telecoil mode thus reducing unwanted background noise. HOW WILL I KNOW WHICH WIRELESS PHONES ARE HEARING AID COMPATIBLE?
The Hearing Aid Compatibility rating is displayed on the wireless phone box. A phone is considered Hearing Aid Compatible for acoustic coupling (microphone mode) if it has an M3 or M4 rating. A digital wireless phone is considered Hearing Aid Compatible for inductive coupling (telecoil mode) if it has a T3 or T4 rating. The tested M-Rating and T-Rating for this device (FCC/IC ID: AZ489FT7104/109U-89FT7104) are M4 and T3. HOW WILL I KNOW IF MY HEARING AID WILL WORK WITH A PARTICULAR DIGITAL WIRELESS PHONE?
Youll want to try a number of wireless phones so that you can decide which works the best with your hearing aids. You may also want to talk with your hearing aid professional about the extent to which 22 MN005019A01-B About This Manual your hearing aids are immune to interference, if they have wireless phone shielding, and whether your hearing aid has a HAC rating. Versions This guide covers various software configurations and references made to operating system or software versions. For the operating system version, software build number, and the kernel version you can go to Settings About phone Phone status. Icons on a screen Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document:
Italics are used to highlight the following:
Chapters and sections in this and related documents Bold text is used to highlight the following:
Dialog box, window, and screen names Drop-down list and list box names Check box and radio button names Key names on a keypad Button names on a screen Bullets () indicate:
Action items Lists of alternatives Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential Sequential lists (for example, those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists. Icon Conventions The documentation set is designed to give the reader more visual clues. The following graphic icons are used throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are described here. WARNING: The word WARNING with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, could result in death or serious injury, or serious product damage. CAUTION: The word CAUTION with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, may result in minor or moderate injury, or serious product damage. NOTICE: NOTICE contains information more important than the surrounding text, such as exceptions or preconditions. They also refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader how to complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the reader where something is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a note. 23 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started Chapter 1 Getting Started In this chapter, you can learn about the features of the LEX L11 device, and how to set up the device before the first power up. 1.1 Device Overview This topic provides an overview of the LEX L11 device. Figure 1: LEX L11 Overview Table 3: LEX L11 Back and Front Item Front camera Earpiece speaker Front microphone #1 Audio Jack SIM card tray Display Loudspeaker USB port Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 24 12345678912101311 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started Number 9 10 11 12 13 Item Front microphone #2 Rear camera and flash Fingerprint sensor Battery cover Rear microphone Figure 2: LEX L11 Top Table 4: LEX L11 Top Number 1 Item Emergency button 2 3 Talkgroup rocker LED Description Upon a long press, the Emergency button initiates Public Safety Emergency operation when the Public Safety applications are installed. NOTICE: For more information on the PSX Cockpit Emergency button, see PSX User Guide. The talkgroup rocker changes talkgroups when used with a Mo-
torola Solutions application that supports it. LED light is a notification light that serves to communicate infor-
mation even when the LEX screen is off. For more information on LED notifications, see Battery Charge Indicators on page 31. 25 132 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started Figure 3: LEX L11 Side Buttons Overview Table 5: LEX L11 Side Buttons Number 1 Button Power button 2 3 4 5 PTT button Volume Up and Volume Down buttons Programmable Button 1 Programmable Button 2 Function A long press of the Power button turns on the device. When the device is on, a long press of the power button displays the Power button menu. A short press toggles the display on and off. When continuously pressed, enables transmission of Push-to-Talk
(PTT) calls in all device modes: active, locked, and/or suspended, when used with a PTT application designed to support it. Controls the audio volume. A short press or a long press of each of the buttons can generate events. Programmable buttons are pre-programmed with default settings, which can generate events even before provisioning. 1.2 Package Contents The LEX L11 package contains the following items:
The LEX L11 device Standard battery/high capacity battery with the appropriate battery cover USB-A to USB-C data/power cable Region-specific wall charger LEX L11 Mission-Critical LTE Device Quick Start Guide RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mission Critical Devices 26 14523 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.3 Setting Up the Device Process:
1 Remove the screen protection film from the device. 2 Install the SIM card(s). See Inserting SIM Cards on page 27. 3 Optional: Install the microSD or CRYPTR card. See Installing a MicroSD Card on page 28. 4 Install the battery. See Installing the Battery on page 29. 5 Attach the battery cover. See Attaching Battery Cover on page 30. 6 Charge the device. See Charging Information on page 30. 1.3.1 Dual SIM Functionality Your LEX device can operate in two different networks. The dual SIM functionality allows you to use two SIM cards in your LEX device. Each SIM card is issued by a different carrier or provider. Whenever you want to switch between the two networks, you can go to Settings SIM cards, and select a radio button next to the SIM slot of your choice. NOTICE: When only a single SIM card is present in the SIM card tray, that SIM card is automatically chosen. 1.3.2 Inserting SIM Cards You can insert one or two Nano SIM cards into the SIM tray. Procedure:
1 By using your fingernail, pull out the Nano SIM card side tray. The Nano SIM card side tray is located on the side of the LEX L11 device, under the audio port. 2 With the phone display facing down, insert the Nano SIM card in the SIM card tray. Figure 4: LEX L11 SIM Card Tray 3 Push the SIM card into the tray until it is fully seated and flat. 4 Insert the Nano SIM card tray back into the device. 27 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.3.2.1 Removing SIM Cards You can follow these steps to remove the Nano SIM cards from the Nano SIM card holder. Procedure:
1 By using your fingernail, pull out the Nano SIM card side tray. The Nano SIM card side tray is located on the side of the LEX L11 device, under the audio port. 2 Remove the Nano SIM card from the SIM card tray. 3 Insert the Nano SIM card tray back into the device. 1.3.3 Installing a MicroSD Card You can follow this procedure to install a microSD card (for example, a memory card, or a CRYPTR micro encryption card) in your device. The following figure describes how to insert a microSD card in your LEX device:
Figure 5: MicroSD Card Insertion Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button. 2 Tap Power Off. Tap OK. 3 Remove the battery cover. See Removing the Battery Cover on page 30. 4 Remove the battery. See Removing the Battery on page 29. 5 Remove the microSD card plug by using your fingernail. 6 If a dummy microSD card is inserted in the microSD plug, remove it and replace it with your microSD card. 7 Insert the microSD card by performing the following actions:
a Insert the microSD card into the microSD plug (1). The angle of insertion should be 45 degrees. The rib of the microSD card must be at the bottom for insertion. b Push the microSD card down and ensure that it is fully seated (2). c When the microSD card is fully seated and flat (3), slide the card with the plug into the card holder slot with contacts facing up. 8 Push the card into the slot until it is fully seated and locked into place. 28 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 9 Insert the battery. See Installing the Battery on page 29. 10 Place the battery cover on the back of the device. 1.3.3.1 Removing a MicroSD Card Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button. 2 Tap Power Off. Tap OK. 3 Remove the battery cover. See Removing the Battery Cover on page 30. 4 Remove the battery. See Removing the Battery on page 29. 5 Remove the microSD card plug by using your nail. 6 Remove the microSD card from the card plug. 7 Reattach the card plug to the card holder slot. 8 Insert the battery. See Installing the Battery on page 29. 9 Place the battery cover on the back of the device. See Attaching Battery Cover on page 30. 1.3.4 Installing the Battery CAUTION: If the device has been submerged, and the battery has been removed, you must allow the battery compartment to dry completely before re-inserting the battery. Failure to do so will result in damage to the device. Procedure:
1 If you are performing initial setup of the device, remove the battery from the packaging. 2 If the battery cover is on, gently remove it from the device. See Removing the Battery Cover on page 30. 3 Make sure the slider on the back of the device is on the unlock position (away from the battery). 4 Insert the battery into the battery compartment, first attaching the top of the battery, where the connector is located. 5 Press the top of the battery in place. 6 Lock the slider by shifting it up. 7 Attach the battery cover. See Attaching Battery Cover on page 30. 1.3.4.1 Removing the Battery Procedure:
1 Gently remove the battery cover. See Removing the Battery Cover on page 30. 2 Make sure the slider on the back of the device is on the unlock position (away from the battery). 3 With the tips of your thumb and index finger, remove the battery by lifting the tab at the bottom of the battery. 4 Place the battery cover on the back of the device. See Attaching Battery Cover on page 30. 29 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.3.5 Attaching Battery Cover Procedure:
1 Place the battery cover on the back of the device. 2 Ensure that all battery cover snaps are fully engaged. 1.3.5.1 Removing the Battery Cover Procedure:
1 Hold the device firmly. 2 Using the battery cover removal slot, gently lift the battery cover up and away. Figure 6: Battery Cover Removal Slot The battery cover removal slot is marked as 1. 1.3.6 Charging Information Before using the LEX L11 for the first time, you must charge the battery by using the provided USB Charger and USB Cable or connect the USB Cable to the USB port of a personal computer. NOTICE: For detailed description, installation, and operation procedures for the LEX device accessories, refer to the quick start guides provided with each accessory. The LEX device typically charges the standard battery up to 90% in about 1.5h in room temperature. NOTICE: Charge times vary by ambient temperature. You can achieve better charging time by using the quick charger. 30 1 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started Batteries can be charged in temperatures from 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Note that charging is intelligently controlled by the LEX L11. To accomplish this, for short periods of time, the LEX L11 alternately enables and disables battery charging to keep the battery at acceptable temperatures. The LEX L11 LED indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures by fast blinking amber (once every two seconds). 1.3.6.1 Battery Charge Indicators The Charge and Notification LED at the top front of the LEX device indicates the battery charging and power level. Battery charging and power level are indicated also by a battery icon on the status bar. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove the device from any power source
(cradle or USB cable connection). For the location of the charge and notification LED on the LEX L11 device, see Device Overview on page 24. Table 6: LEX L11 Notification LEDs State Off Blinking blue Indications The battery is not charging. This can indicate that:
The device is not inserted correctly in the cradle. The device is not connected to a USB cable. The charger or cradle is not powered. New notifications:
New Voice Mail New notification (for example, Android App Notification) New SMS or MMS New Email Missed Call Solid green The battery is fully charged. NOTICE: This only applies when the device is connected to USB, Dual-
Unit Charger (DUC), or Multi-Unit Charger (MUC). Slowly blinking red Solid red Fast blinking red Low battery notification (10% or less). The battery is charging. Charging errors:
Too high or too low battery charging temper-
ature Invalid battery When the battery power falls below a predetermined level, the icon indicates the state, and a battery dialog box appears indicating the status of the battery. The message displays until you tap Dismiss. 31 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started To monitor battery usage, from the Home screen, tap All Apps Settings Battery. 1.3.6.2 Turning On Battery Saving Mode You can follow these steps to enter the battery saving mode. When the battery saver is turned on, some device features become unavailable, such as WLAN connectivity, mobile data, Bluetooth, GPS, NFC, and hotspot. Vibration and most background data is limited. Screen brightness in battery saving mode is reduced. Applications that rely on syncing may not update unless you open them. NOTICE: The battery saving mode turns off automatically when your device is charging. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign and tap Settings. 2 In Settings, tap Battery. 3 Select Battery saver and tap the slider next to Off. 4 Tap Turn on automatically and, from the list of options, select when you want your device to automatically enter the battery saving mode. You can select one of the following options:
Never at 5% battery at 15% battery 5 Select the option of your choice by tapping it. 1.4 Powering On the Device for the First Time The first time you turn on your device, you are guided through a setup process. NOTICE: Some of the settings selected in this procedure can be changed later in Android Settings, if needed. Procedure:
1 Turn on the device by long-pressing the Power button. The device boots up. 2 Select Exit to Google Setup Wizard and, in the Continue with Google Setup wizard prompt, tap Continue. The Welcome screen appears. 32 Figure 7: LEX L11 Welcome Screen MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 3 Choose the language in which you want your device to operate by selecting a language from the English drop-down list. 4 Tap Let's Go. 5 On the Get Connected page, connect to a Wi-Fi network available in your area. a Tap a network name of your choice. b Enter the password. c Tap Connect. 6 On the Set up email page, set up your email account by selecting one of the options available. If you have a Gmail account, you can use the same e-mail address and password to sign in. After you sign in, all your e-mail, contacts, calendar events, and other data associated with that account are synced to your device. If you do not have a Google account, you can create one during the setup process, or connect your device by using your e-mail account in another domain. 7 On the Protect your phone page, select the screen lock you want to use, and follow the on-
screen instructions. 8 On the next screen, select options of your choice and tap Next. 9 On the Anything else? screen, when finished, tap All set. If you have more than one Google account, you can add them later. Postrequisites: If you want a keyboard that matches the language selected for your LEX L11, search on keyboard and that language in the Google Play Store, then install the keyboard that your organization recommends. 33 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.5 Powering On Procedure:
Press and hold the Power button. The device boots up. 1.6 Powering Off Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button. The Power button menu displays. 2 Tap Power off. 1.7 Battery Management This section explains how to check the status of your battery and what you can do to make your battery last longer. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove the device from any AC power source (cradle or cable). To check the charge status of the main battery, from the Home screen, you can swipe the screen up from the arrow sign, and tap Battery status indicates that the battery is discharging, and Battery level lists the battery charge (as a percentage of fully charged). About Phone Status. 1.7.1 Battery Usage Monitor The Battery screen lists applications and allows you to check how much energy they consume. You can turn off applications that consume too much energy. You can access the battery usage monitor by swiping the home screen up from the arrow sign, and tapping Battery. 34 Figure 8: Battery Screen MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started The Battery screen lists the applications using the battery. The discharge graph at the top of the screen shows the rate of the battery discharge since last charged, and how long it has been running on battery power. You can tap an application in the Battery screen to display details about its power consumption. Different applications display different information. Some applications include buttons that open screens with settings to adjust power use. 1.7.2 Low Battery Notification When the battery charge level drops below 15%, you should charge the battery by using one of the charging accessories. When the battery charge drops below 15%, the device displays a notice to connect the device to power, and the red LED slowly blinks. When the battery charge drops below 1%, the device turns off. You must charge the device by using one of the charging accessories to maintain power. 1.7.3 Battery Optimization You can observe the following battery saving tips:
You can leave the device inside a cradle connected to AC power at all times when not in use. You can turn off Bluetooth and/or Wi-Fi if not needed. You can change screen time-out to be as short as possible. You can charge the device when not in use. You can set the screen to Suspend (Sleep) after a short period of non-use. You can reduce screen brightness. You can minimize use of applications that keep the device from suspending, for example, music or video applications. You can turn Battery Saver on. 35 MN005019A01-B Chapter 1: Getting Started 1.7.3.1 Entering Airplane Mode The Airplane Mode disables radio-frequency signal transmission by the LEX device. When enabled, the device cannot establish any Bluetooth, GPS, telephone, or Wi-Fi connections. NOTICE: While in airplane mode, you can turn Bluetooth and/or Wi-Fi on. See Enabling Bluetooth on page 58 and Connecting to Wi-Fi Networks on page 60. Procedure:
1 Press the Power button until the Power Button menu appears. 2 Go offline by tapping Airplane mode. The airplane icon appears in the Status bar indicating that all radios are off. 36 MN005019A01-B Basic Functions Chapter 2 Basic Functions Basic functions of the LEX L11 device include touchscreen navigation, entering text by using the on-
screen keyboard, managing notifications, and others. 2.1 Home Screen Figure 9: LEX L11 Home Screen Overview Table 7: LEX L11 Home Screen Item number 1 2 3 4 5 Description Status BarDisplays status and notification icons. WidgetAn application extension that is part of an application installed on your device. Application FolderYou can group several files into folders. Application Icon Arrow SignYou can swipe up from the arrow sign to open the Apps screen. 37 123546 MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions Item number 6 Table 8: On-Screen Navigation Buttons Item Description Application ShortcutsAllow you to access your favorite applications quickly. Description Back buttonallows you to exit application win-
dows. Home buttonyou can tap it to return to the home screen. Overview buttonallows you to view a list of applications that are currently open on your LEX device. You can manage the application windows. See Switching to Multiple Active Win-
dows View on page 41. 2.2 Touchscreen Navigation The LEX device is equipped with a multi-touch screen. Table 9: Touchscreen Actions Action Tap Tap and Hold Drag Swipe 38 Result You can tap to:
Select items on the screen Type letters and symbols using the on-
screen keyboard Press on-screen buttons You can tap and hold:
An item on the Home screen to move it to a new location (by dragging it) or to remove An item in Apps to create a shortcut on the Home screen An empty area on the Home screen until the menu appears An application to perform application actions You can tap and hold an item for a moment and then move your finger on the screen until you reach the new position for that item. You can move your finger up, down, left, or right on the screen to:
Unlock the screen View additional Home screens Action Result MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions Double-tap Pinch View additional application icons in the Launcher window View more information on an application screen You can tap twice on a webpage, map, or other screen to zoom in and out. In some applications, you can zoom in and out by placing two fingers on the screen and pinch-
ing them together (to zoom out) or spreading them apart (to zoom in). 2.3 On-Screen Keyboard The on-screen keyboard is used to enter text in a text field. Text Editing You can edit entered text and use menu commands to cut, copy, and paste text within or across applications. Some applications do not support editing some or all of the text they display; others may offer their own way to select text. Numbers, Symbols, and Special Characters To enter numbers and symbols:
Without switching to the Numbers or Symbols keyboard, it is possible to tap and hold one of the top-row keys until a menu appears and then select a number. By tapping the arrow key, you can enter a capital letter. When you tap and hold the arrow key until it becomes underlined, you can enter two or more capital letters. By tapping the arrow key again, you can return to the lowercase keyboard. By tapping the ?123 key, you can switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. By tapping the By tapping and holding a key, you can open a menu with additional characters available under that key, you can view additional symbols. key. 2.3.1 Google Keyboard Settings The Google Keyboard Settings may be personalized to meet your preferences. Table 10: Google Keyboard Settings Google keyboard settings are located at Settings Languages & Input Virtual keyboard Gboard. Setting Languages Description You can select the language to be used in the keyboard. 39 MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions Setting Preferences Theme Text correction Glide Typing Voice Typing Dictionary Search Advanced Description Allows you to adjust settings such as one-hand-
ed mode, sound on keypress, vibrate on key-
press, and others. Allows you to select the keyboard theme: you can choose from one of your images, or from other themes available on the device. You can choose from text correction options, such as show suggestion strip, block offensive words, suggest contact names, auto-correction, and others. These settings allow you to enter a word by sliding through the letters on the keyboard. You can adjust voice typing settings, such as the language to be spoken. You can choose to sync learned words, or to delete learned words from your personal dic-
tionary. You can choose to use predictive search, or to show the Search and more button in the sug-
gestion strip for faster access to Search. These settings allow you to display application icons in the launcher, or to have a physical ALT key show the emoji keyboard. You an also de-
cide to improve Gboard statistics. 2.3.2 Google Voice Typing You can enter text by speaking. Procedure:
1 On the Google keyboard, tap 2 Start speaking your text. 3 When finished, tap
. 2.3.2.1 Adjusting Google Voice Typing Settings Procedure:
1 On the home screen, swipe up from the arrow sign and tap Settings. 2 Select Languages & Input Virtual keyboard Google voice typing. 3 Configure the settings of your choice. 40 MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions 2.4 Status Bar Icons Status icons give you status information on actions occurring on your LEX device. Table 11: Status Bar Icons For the location of the Status Bar, see Home Screen on page 37. Icon Description Indicates the battery is fully charged. Indicates the battery level is low (20% or less). Indicates the battery is charging. Indicates the alarm is active. Indicates the Bluetooth service is on. Indicates that the device is connected to a Wi-Fi network. Indicates that there is no Wi-Fi signal. Indicates all sounds except media and alarms are silenced and vibrate mode is active. Indicates the Airplane Mode is active. Indicates that location services are on. Indicates that a file was downloaded to the de-
vice. Indicates that a file was sent from the device. Indicates that do not disturb is on. Indicates mobile network signal strength. Indicates no SIM card is present. Indicates howling suppression is on. 2.5 Switching to Multiple Active Windows View The LEX device supports multi-window view, which allows for dragging and dropping data between the panes. You can view two applications side-by-side on your device screen. This feature works in both portrait and landscape mode. 41 MN005019A01-B Chapter 2: Basic Functions NOTICE: Some applications may not support this functionality. Procedure:
1 Start the applications that you want to use simultaneously. 2 Long press the square Overview button located at the bottom of the device screen. The screen splits in two. One half of it displays the most recently opened application, and the other one displays a list of the rest of the recently opened applications. 3 Select an application by sliding your finger on the list of applications and tapping an application of your choice. 2.6 Accessing Files from a Computer Procedure:
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB type C cable. 2 Open the Notifications panel by swiping the screen down from the Status bar. Figure 10: Notifications Panel 3 Tap the USB for... notification. 4 In the Use USB to screen, select one of the following:
If you want to transfer files to Windows or Mac (MTP), select File transfers. If you want to access photos or other files on a computer that does not support MTP, select Photo transfer (PTP). If you want to use LEX for MIDI input, select MIDI. 42 MN005019A01-B Device Settings Chapter 3 Device Settings This chapter describes ways to personalize your LEX L11 device by changing the default device settings. NOTICE: If you cannot access features described in this section, contact your device technician for more information. 3.1 Covert Mode In the Covert Mode, the device goes dark and quiet. All visible and audible alerts and notifications are shut down. This feature makes the LEX device effectively unnoticeable even in a silent and dark environment. In Covert Mode, the following sounds, visual indications, and keys are disabled:
Display backlight Touchscreen Keylight LED indications Vibration and haptics - optional Speaker audio NOTICE: In Covert Mode, sound is routed to a Bluetooth headset, if connected or sound is routed to a wired earpiece, if connected. Alternatively, sound is routed to the earpiece. In Covert Mode, the following features remain active:
Power button PTT button Emergency button Talkgroup Rocker button Programmable buttons Volume button Audio indications are available using a wired headset (through headset port) or a Bluetooth headset. When the LEX device is in covert mode, after a long press of the power key, the device illuminates the display backlight at low intensity to display the Power button menu where you can exit covert mode. 3.1.1 Turning On Covert Mode Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The Power Button menu appears. 43 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 2 Tap Covert mode. The screen goes blank. 3.1.2 Turning Off Covert Mode Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The Power Button menu appears. 2 Tap Covert mode. All audible and visual settings, such as loudspeaker volume, display brightness, and vibration, return to the same settings and levels as they were before the device entered the Covert Mode. 3.1.3 Configuring Covert Mode Procedure:
1 In Settings, select Languages & input. 2 Tap Covert Mode settings. 3 Adjust the slidebars next to the options of your choice. 3.2 Setting Programmable Buttons You can set the LEX L11 programmable buttons to perform various actions. Each button can have two functions: one for short press, and one for long press. For the exact location of the programmable buttons on the LEX L11 device, see Device Overview on page 24. NOTICE: Programmable buttons are pre-programmed with default settings, which can generate events even before provisioning. Procedure:
1 From the main menu, pull down the Notification bar. 2 Tap Settings 3 In the Programmable Buttons window, select one of the following options:
Languages and Input Programmable buttons. Programmable button -1- short press Programmable button -1- long press Programmable button -2- short press Programmable button -2- long press 4 From the list of available applications/settings, select one application/setting by tapping the radio button next to it. The list of available options is as follows:
Covert mode ON/OFF toggle - default for long press on top programmable button Home 44 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings Screen brightness up Screen brightness down Camera - default for short press on top programmable button Answer call (when ringing) or end call (when in call) - default for short press on bottom programmable button Ringer/Media Mute/Unmute - default for long press on bottom programmable button No event OK Google (open in Google App listening for instructions) 3.3 LEX Series Screen Lock You can cause the LEX device screen to lock automatically by specifying a pattern, PIN, password, or a fingerprint. If you establish a PIN, pattern, password, or a fingerprint as a preferred way to unlock the device screen, you can keep your data secured. NOTICE: If the device screen lock option is set to None or Swipe, your data is not secured and can be accessed by anyone. When the device is on, you can lock your device by pressing the Power button, and unlock by providing a pattern, PIN, password, or a fingerprint. If you did not specify a pattern, PIN, password, or a fingerprint, you can also unlock the LEX device by swiping up the device screen, or only by pressing the Power button if no locking option was set. When the device is locked and cellular network signal is available, phone calls, notification of new messages, missed calls and upcoming appointments still can be received. You can also set the device to automatically lock after a specified time. See Setting Timeout for Locking on page 47. 3.3.1 Selecting a Locking Option Security dictates a specific level of locking for the LEX device screen. You may protect the device by setting a password, PIN, a pattern, or a fingerprint as a locking option, but you may also decide not to select any of these options at all (not recommended). NOTICE: Your account may enforce more stringent locking requirements than those listed here. For more information, contact your device administrator. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign, and tap 2 Select Security Screen lock. The following options are displayed:
None. Swipe You must slide the lock to unlock the device. Pattern You must replicate a specified pattern to unlock the device. PIN You must enter a PIN to unlock the device. Password You must enter a specified password to unlock the device. 45 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3 Select an option of your choice by tapping it. If If you selected PIN, If you selected Pattern, If you selected Password, The device is set to lock. 46 Then perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your PIN when it starts up, in the Secure start-up window, tap Require PIN to start device. b In the Choose your PIN window, enter a PIN code of at least four digits and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your PIN. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your pattern when it starts up, in the Secure start-up window, tap Require pattern to start device. b In the Choose your pattern window, create your pattern that connects at least four dots and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your pattern. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your password when it starts up, in the Se-
cure start-up window, tap Require password to start device. b In the Choose your password window, enter a password of at least four charac-
ters and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your password. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.3.2 Setting Timeout for Locking You may specify the timeout for device locking. After the set amount of time, the device automatically locks. Prerequisites: Ensure that the screen lock is set to pattern, PIN, or password. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Select Security. next to Screen lock. 3 Tap 4 Tap Automatically lock. 5 Select a timeout value from the list. 3.3.3 Device Unlock When the LEX device is not used for a period of time and you try to access the device, the Lock screen displays. Depending on which Screen lock option is active, you can do one of the following:
Nothing. Swipe the screen. Enter a pattern, PIN, or password, or unlock the device by using a fingerprint. 3.3.3.1 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 Swipe the screen from the bottom upwards. 3 By using a finger, draw the specified pattern on the screen. Once the correct pattern is drawn, the device unlocks. 3.3.3.2 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 Swipe the screen from the bottom upwards. 3 In the text field, enter your PIN or password. 4 Tap
. The device unlocks and the Home screen is shown. 47 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.3.3.3 Setting Unlock with Fingerprint You can follow this procedure to be able to unlock your device by touching the fingerprint sensor. You can use your fingerprint to unlock applications. NOTICE:
A fingerprint may be less secure than a strong PIN, pattern, or password. Your account may enforce more stringent locking requirements than those listed here. For more information, contact your device administrator. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign, and tap 2 Select Security Fingerprint. 3 In the Unlock with fingerprint window, tap NEXT. 4 In the Unlock selection window, choose your backup screen lock method. The backup method is used when:
You restart the device The fingerprint sensor does not recognize your fingerprint after a few attempts You switch to a different user You did not use your backup method to unlock your device for more than 48 hours. 5 Depending on the choice you made in step 4, perform one of the following actions:
If If you selected PIN, If you selected Pattern, 48 Then perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your PIN when it starts up, in the Secure start-up window, tap Require PIN to start device. b In the Choose your PIN window, enter a PIN code of at least four digits and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your PIN. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your pattern when it starts up, in the Secure start-up window, tap Require pattern to start device. b In the Choose your pattern window, create your pattern that connects at least four dots and tap CONTINUE. If Then MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings If you selected Password, c Confirm your pattern. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. perform the following actions:
a If you want your device to require your password when it starts up, in the Se-
cure start-up window, tap Require password to start device. b In the Choose your password window, enter a password of at least four charac-
ters and tap CONTINUE. c Confirm your password. d In the Notifications window, decide how you want your notifications shown by se-
lecting a radio button of your choice and tapping DONE. 6 Add your fingerprint by following the on-screen instructions. The fingerprint sensor is located on the back of the device. See Device Overview on page 24. 7 In the Fingerprint added screen, tap DONE. You can add more than one fingerprint. 3.3.3.3.1 Unlocking the Device by Using the Fingerprint Sensor Procedure:
Press your finger to the fingerprint sensor on the back of the device. The device screen unlocks. 3.3.4 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device You can make an emergency call even when the LEX device is locked and you do not remember your PIN, pattern, or password. Procedure:
1 Press the Power button. 2 Tap EMERGENCY at the bottom of the lock screen. The Emergency Dialer screen displays. 3 Enter the emergency number. 4 Tap
. 49 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.4 Setting Date and Time When the LEX device is connected to cellular network, date and time are automatically synchronized. You can perform this procedure to manually set the date and time on your LEX device. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap 3 Tap Date & time. 4 Disable automatic date and time synchronization by tapping Automatic date & time. 5 Disable automatic time zone synchronization by tapping Automatic time zone. 6 Tap Set date. 7 Select a month, date and year. 8 Tap OK. 9 Tap Set time. 10 Select the hour, minutes and part of the day by sliding your finger up and down. 11 Tap OK. 12 Tap Select time zone. 13 Tap to select a time zone from the list. 3.5 Setting the Display The following LEX device display features can be customized:
Brightness level Set the brightness of the display. Adaptive brightness Optimize brightness level for available light. Wallpaper Choose a background type on the home and lock screens. Sleep Set the time the device waits before turning off the backlight of the display. Screen saver Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is docked inside a cradle or charging. Ambient display Wake screen when you receive notifications. Font size Change the font size for display text. Display size Change the display size. When device is rotated Rotate the contents of the screen. Cast Enable the device to project the screen to a TV or other device. 3.5.1 Setting Screen Brightness Level Procedure:
1 In Settings 2 Set the brightness level by adjusting the Brightness level slidebar.
, tap Display Brightness level. 50 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.5.2 Setting Adaptive Brightness Optimize brightness level for available light. Procedure:
From Display, set the Adaptive brightness slidebar to the ON position. 3.5.3 Changing Wallpapers You can set an image or a photo stored in your device as your home screen wallpaper. Procedure:
1 Tap and hold the home screen. 2 From the context menu, select Wallpapers. 3 Scroll through the available images and tap a photo or image of your choice. 4 Tap Set wallpaper. 3.5.4 Setting Up Sleep Mode Use this procedure to set up sleep mode (screen time-out). Procedure:
1 From Settings 2 Select one of the sleep values by tapping a value of your choice.
, tap Display Sleep. 3.5.5 Setting Up Screen Saver Procedure:
, select Display Screen saver. 1 In Settings 2 Select one of the available options by tapping it. You can configure your the options by tapping next to your selection. 3 Tap
, tap When to start screen saver and select when you would like the feature to be active (While docked, while charging, or either). 4 Preview and confirm your selection by tapping Start now. 3.5.6 Setting Font Size Procedure:
1 In Display settings, tap Font size. 2 Slide your finger on the scale to adjust the font size. 51 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.5.7 Setting Display Size Procedure:
1 In Display settings, tap Display size. 2 Adjust the display size by sliding your finger left to right on the scale. 3.5.8 Setting Screen Rotation Screen rotation enables the LEX device to automatically determine the orientation of the screen to portrait or landscape. NOTICE: Some applications may not support screen rotation. Procedure:
1 In the Display settings, tap When device is rotated. 2 Select one of the following options:
If you want the screen to rotate, select Rotate the contents of the screen. If you do not want the screen to rotate, select Stay in portrait view. 3.5.9 Enabling Cast Screen When and where to use: You can use this procedure to enable the LEX device to project the screen to a TV or other device. Procedure:
1 In the Display settings, tap Cast. 2 Tap . 3 Select Enable wireless display. 3.6 Sound Settings Sound settings allow you to configure default media, alarm, and ring volume levels and ringtones. 3.6.1 Adjusting Sound Settings Sound settings allow you to adjust media, alarm, and ring volume. Procedure:
Sound & notification. 1 Tap 2 Adjust the slidebars for media, alarm, and ring volume. 3 If you want your device to vibrate for calls, adjust the slidebar for Also vibrate for calls. 52 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.6.2 Enabling Howling Suppression You can enable a microphone and loudspeaker sound profile that suppresses feedback loop and screeching or howling noise in a half-duplex call when sending and receiving phones are close to each other. Procedure:
Enable howling suppression by performing one of the following actions:
If If you want to enable howling suppres-
sion from the Settings menu, If you want to enable howling suppres-
sion from the Quick Settings panel, Then perform the following actions:
a From the main menu, tap Settings Sound. b Slide the Howling Suppression toggle to ON. perform the following actions:
a Pull down the Quick Settings panel. b Tap
. 3.6.2.1 Disabling Howling Suppression You can perform this procedure to disable the howling suppression feature. Procedure:
1 From the main menu, tap Settings Sound. 2 Disable howling suppression by performing one of the following actions:
If If you want to disable howling suppres-
sion from the Settings menu, Then perform the following actions:
a From the main menu, tap Settings Sound. b Slide the Howling Suppression toggle to OFF. If you want to disable howling suppres-
sion from the Notifications panel, perform the following actions:
a Pull down the Notifications panel. b Tap
. 53 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 3.6.3 Setting Up Do Not Disturb The Do not disturb setting allows you to mute alarms, reminders, events, messages, and calls. You can set a schedule so that Do not disturb is turned on and off automatically. You can set exceptions on chosen elements. Procedure:
Sound Do not disturb Priority only allows. 1 Tap 2 Set exceptions by following these steps:
a If you want to unmute Reminders, adjust the Reminders slidebar. b If you want to unmute Events, adjust the Events slidebar. c If you want to set exception on Messages, select Messages and choose from the list of available options. d If you want to set exception on Calls, tap Calls and choose from the list of available options. e If you want to repeat callers, adjust the Repeat callers slidebar. 3.6.3.1 Setting Automatic Rules Automatic rules allow you to set a schedule when Do not disturb turns on and off automatically. Procedure:
Sound Do not disturb Automatic rules. 1 Tap 2 Choose from the following automatic rules:
If If you want to set automatic rules for weekends, If you want to set automatic rules for weeknights, 54 Then perform the following actions:
a Select Weekend and adjust the slidebar to the On position. b Set the following:
Rule name Days Start time End time Do not disturb Alarm can override end time perform the following actions:
a Select Weeknights and adjust the slide-
bar to the On position. b Set the following:
Rule name If Then MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings If you want to set automatic rules for events, If you want to add a new rule, Days Start time End time Do not disturb Alarm can override end time perform the following actions:
a Select Event and adjust the slidebar to the On position. b Set the following:
Rule name During events for Where reply is Do not disturb perform the following actions:
a Select Add rule. b Enter the rule name and set it to time rule or event rule. c Set the following:
Rule name Days Start time End time Do not disturb Alarm can override end time 3.6.4 Enabling Hearing Aid Compatibility You can follow this procedure to enable hearing aid compatibility on your LEX L11 device. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has adopted hearing-aid compatibility (HAC) requirements for digital wireless phones. By using a hearing aid with a hearing aid compatible LEX L11, you can improve your ability to hear on the phone. WARNING: When the hearing aid compatibility is enabled, the handset mode volume level of voice calls may be increased above safe levels. Listening at a high volume for a long time may damage your hearing. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap 3 Select Sound. 4 Tap Other sounds. 55 MN005019A01-B Chapter 3: Device Settings 5 Enable hearing aid compatibility by setting the Hearing aid compatibility toggle to the ON position. 3.6.4.1 Disabling Hearing Aid Compatibility Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap 3 Select Sound. 4 Tap Other sounds. 5 Disable hearing aid compatibility by setting the Hearing aid compatibility toggle to the OFF position. 56 MN005019A01-B Wireless Chapter 4 Wireless This section provides information on the wireless features of the LEX L11 device. 4.1 Bluetooth Profiles The LEX device supports a wide range of Bluetooth services. Table 12: Bluetooth Profiles Bluetooth Profile Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP SRC) Handsfree Profile (HFP AG) Headset Profile (HSP AG) Human Interface Device Profile (HID Host) Serial Port Profile (SPP Dev A, Dev B) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Service Discovery Application Profile (SDAP) Dial-up Networking (DUN GW) Profile Generic Object Exchange Profile (GOEP) Object Push Profile (OPP Client/Server) Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile
(GAVDP) Message Access Profile (MAP MSE) Description Allows the device to stream stereo-quality audio to a wireless headset or wireless stereo speak-
ers. Provides the capability for carkits and Bluetooth headset to be used for phone calls and control them (initiate, answer, terminate, and other). Provides support for the popular Bluetooth headsets to be used with mobile phones with ability to ring, answer a call, hang up, and ad-
just the volume. Allows Bluetooth keyboards, pointing devices, gaming devices, and remote monitoring devices to connect to the device. Sets up a virtual serial port and connects two Bluetooth-enabled devices. For example, con-
necting the device to a printer. This profile defines how Bluetooth-enabled de-
vices can make themselves available and how two devices can communicate directly with each other. Describes how an application should use SDP to discover services on a remote device. Allows the device to share Internet connection with another device. Provides a basis for other data profiles. Allows the device to push and pull objects to and from a push server. Provides the basis for A2DP and VDP. This pro-
file defines two roles: initiator (INT) and accept-
or (ACP). Allows exchange of messages between devi-
ces. 57 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless Bluetooth Profile Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP TG) Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP PSE) File Transfer Profile (FTP Server) Personal Area Networking (PAN NAP/PANU) Profile Proximity Profile (PXP Monitor) Health Device Profile (HDP) SIM Access Profile (SAP) Generic Attribute (GATT) and attribute protocol
(ATT) Description Allows remote devices to control audio playback on local device (for example: play, pause, stop, adjust volume). Allows exchange of Phone Book Objects be-
tween a car kit and a mobile phone to allow the car kit to display the name of the incoming call-
er; allow the car kit to download the phone book so the user can initiate a call from the car dis-
play. Provides the capability to expose local file sys-
tem to remote devices which can manipulate and transfer files. Allows the device to share Internet connection with another device (for example a laptop) and to access the Internet shared by another device
(for example a Bluetooth enabled phone). Enables proximity monitoring between two devi-
ces. Makes transmission and reception of Medical Device data possible. Allows devices with built-in GSM transceivers to connect to a SIM card in a Bluetooth enabled phone. These devices do not need to have sep-
arate SIM cards. Allows profile discovery and description serv-
ices for Bluetooth Low Energy protocol. 4.2 Bluetooth Power States The Bluetooth radio is off by default. The following modes are available:
Suspend When the device goes into suspend mode, the Bluetooth radio stays on. Airplane Mode When the device is placed in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio turns off. When Airplane Mode is disabled, the Bluetooth radio returns to the prior state. When in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio can be turned back on if desired. 4.3 Enabling Bluetooth Bluetooth allows you to send to and receive data from other Bluetooth-enabled devices paired with your LEX device. Procedure:
1 On the Settings 2 Switch the Bluetooth slidebar to the On position. page, tap Bluetooth. 58 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless 4.4 Disabling Bluetooth Procedure:
1 On the Settings 2 Switch the Bluetooth slidebar to the Off position. page, tap Bluetooth. 4.5 Renaming the Device By default, your LEX device has a generic Bluetooth name visible to other devices when connected. Procedure:
1 In Settings 2 If Bluetooth is not on, adjust the Bluetooth slidebar.
, tap Bluetooth. and select Rename this device. 3 Tap 4 Enter a new device name and tap Rename. 4.6 Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices The LEX device can receive and send data when paired with other Bluetooth-enabled devices. Prerequisites: Ensure that Bluetooth is enabled on both devices, and that the device you want to pair your LEX with is in discoverable mode. Procedure:
1 On the Settings 2 Enable Bluetooth by adjusting the slidebar to the ON position. page, tap Bluetooth. The device searches for available Bluetooth-enabled devices and lists them. 3 Scroll through the list and tap a device name. The Pairing request dialog box displays. 4 Compare the pass keys on both devices and tap Pair on both devices. The device is added to the Paired devices list. 4.6.1 Managing Bluetooth Devices You can manage Bluetooth devices paired with your LEX by renaming the devices, sharing contacts, and more. Procedure:
1 Tap 2 If you want to rename the device, tap the Name field. located next to a paired Bluetooth device. 59 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless 3 If you want to unpair the device, tap Forget. 4 If you want to share contacts with the device, tap Contact sharing. Some Bluetooth-enabled accessories/devices allow for more profiles to be used. 4.7 Connecting to Wi-Fi Networks Wi-Fi is a wireless network technology that provides Internet access at distance up to 100 feet, depending on the Wi-Fi router and surroundings. You can access Internet when you connect your LEX device to a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign and tap Settings 2 Tap WLAN. The device searches for wireless networks in the area and lists them. 3 Scroll through the list and select the desired network. 4 Enter the password and tap Connect. You can verify the password before connecting by tapping Show password. Adding New Networks You can add a Wi-Fi network that does not broadcast its name (SSID), or is currently out of range. Procedure:
1 In the WLAN screen, select Add network. 2 Enter the following details:
Network name: The wireless network SSID Security: Set the security type to None, WEP, WPA/WPA2 PSK, 802.1x EAP 3 Tap Show Advanced Options and set the Proxy details and IP settings. 4 Tap SAVE. Editing Networks Procedure:
1 Touch and hold the connected network. 2 Select Modify Network. 3 Save the settings by tapping Save. Forgetting Networks You can disconnect your device from a remembered wireless network. Procedure:
1 Touch and hold the connected network. 60 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless 2 Select Forget Network. The device disconnects from the selected network. You are prompted for the password if you try to connect to the same network again. 4.8 Configuring Wi-Fi Hotspots The LEX device can serve as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot, which allows you to connect 32 other devices to the wireless Internet provided by the LEX device. In Wi-Fi Access Point mode, the LEX L11 device supports two authentication types:
None WPA2-PSK Prerequisites: Ensure that your device has Internet connection. Procedure:
1 From the home screen, swipe the screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap Settings. 3 In the Wireless and networks section, tap More .... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Tap Set up WLAN hotspot. The Set up WLAN hotspot screen displays. Figure 11: Set up WLAN Hotspot Dialog Box 6 In the Network Name text field, edit the network name. 7 Tap the Security option and select a security method from the drop-down list:
None WPA2 PSK 8 In the Password text field, enter a password. NOTICE: If None is selected in the Security field, a password is not required. 61 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless 9 Under Select AP Band, tap the 2.4 GHz Band drop-down list, and select one of the following options:
2.4 GHz 5 GHz Without the SIM card, only the 2.4 GHz band is supported. 10 Tap Save. 4.9 Setting Up USB Tethering You can share your mobile Internet connection with a computer or with other devices. Prerequisites: Connect your device to a computer by using a USB cable. Procedure:
1 On the Settings 2 Enable USB tethering. page, tap More Tethering & Portable hotspot. 4.10 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering You can use this procedure to tether Bluetooth to share the data connection with a host computer. Prerequisites: Configure the host computer to obtain its network connection using Bluetooth. For more information, see the host computer documentation. Procedure:
1 Pair the LEX device with the host computer. See Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices on page 59. 2 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign and tap Settings 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Adjust the Bluetooth tethering slidebar. The host computer is now sharing the LEX device data connection. 4.11 Near-Field Communication Near-field communication (NFC) allows you to establish one- and two-way communication between two electronic devices by bringing them close to each other at a distance of max. 2 cm. The following are the examples of how NFC could be used. Some of the examples may require the use of other applications:
LEX L11 can act as a badge for physical access (doors entry) LEX L11 can be used as a physical token to access protected networks and/or services NFC tag reading 62 MN005019A01-B Chapter 4: Wireless NOTICE:
The NFC feature is set to OFF by default. You can turn NFC on or off when the device is in Airplane mode. Turning on NFC displays the current setting for Tap and Pay in Android Settings. The practical applications of NFC available to the user may depend on other applications. 4.11.1 Turning NFC On You can perform this procedure to enable near-field communication (NFC) transfers between your LEX L11 device and other devices. Procedure:
Pull down the Quick Settings panel, and perform one of the following actions:
If If you want to turn NFC on from the Quick Settings panel, If you want to turn NFC on from the Set-
tings page, Then slide the NFC toggle to the ON position. perform the following actions:
a Tap Settings b On the Settings page, tap Wireless and
. Network More. You can start using the NFC feature on your device. You can transfer data to and from other devices when your LEX device touches another device. NOTICE: The maximum distance between the devices is two (2) cm. c Set the NFC slidebar to the On position. 4.11.2 Turning NFC Off You can perform this procedure to disable the near field communication (NFC) feature on your LEX L11 device. Procedure:
Pull down the Quick Settings panel. If If you want to turn NFC off from the Quick Settings panel, If you want to turn NFC off from the Set-
tings page, Then slide the NFC toggle to the OFF position. perform the following actions:
a Tap Settings b On the Settings page, tap Wireless and
. Network More. c Set the NFC slidebar to the OFF position. 63 MN005019A01-B Chapter 5: Contacts Chapter 5 Contacts You can use the Contacts application to maintain phone numbers and other data. 5.1 Adding New Contacts You can add new contacts to the phonebook. Procedure:
1 On the home screen, tap
. 2 Tap
, and enter the contact details. 3 Add the new contact by tapping SAVE. 5.2 Editing Contact Details You can edit the details of your contacts. Procedure:
1 On the home screen, tap 2 Tap the contact that you want to modify. 3 Tap 4 Edit the required details, and tap SAVE. 5.3 Searching Contacts You can use the search option to quickly find specific contacts from the list. Procedure:
1 On the home screen, tap
. 2 Tap and perform one of the following actions:
If you want to browse by name, enter the first few letters of the contact name. If you want to browse by phone number, enter the first few digits of the contact phone number. All contacts that contain the text entered in the search field are displayed. 64 MN005019A01-B Chapter 5: Contacts 5.4 Sharing Contacts You can send contact information by MMS, Bluetooth, Drive, and e-mail. Procedure:
1 Open the Contacts application. Select. 2 Tap 3 Tap the contacts that you want to share. 4 Tap 5 From the list of suggested sharing applications, tap the application of your choice. 6 Choose when to select the transfer mode by selecting one of the following options:
To select the transfer mode each time, tap Just Once. To send contacts by using the same method, tap Always. 65 MN005019A01-B Chapter 6: Calling Chapter 6 Calling This chapter describes using the Phone application, for example making calls and conference calls. 6.1 Making Calls Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 Dial a number by performing one of the following actions:
. If If you want to make a call by directly en-
tering a number, Then perform the following actions:
If you want to make a call by using Speed Dial, a Tap
. b Enter the phone number and tap perform the following actions:
. a Tap b Tap and hold the key that corresponds to
. a contact number that you want to call. If you want to call a recently called num-
ber, perform the following actions:
If you want to make a call by searching the contacts already saved on your de-
vice, a Tap b From the list, tap the contact that you
. want to call. c Tap perform the following actions:
a Tap b From the list, tap the contact that you
. want to call. 3 If you want to adjust audio settings during the call, perform one of the following actions:
c When the contact displays, tap next to the number. 66 MN005019A01-B Chapter 6: Calling Then tap tap
. If You want to turn on the speakerphone, You want to mute the call, 4 End the call by tapping
. 6.1.1 Setting Up Speed Dial Procedure:
1 Open the Phone application. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold 2. 4 In the Key unassigned prompt, tap Yes. 5 In the Speed dial settings window, tap a key to assign a contact to it. 6 In the prompt, enter the number that you want to assign to the selected key, or tap the Contacts icon next to the field to select a number from a contact list. 7 When finished, tap OK. 6.2 Making Conference Calls You can use this procedure to create a conference call with multiple people. Conference calling (Add Call) is available if you want to talk to more than one user at a time. NOTICE: Conference calling may not be supported by your service provider. Check with your service provider technical support for conference calling availability. The total number of conference call participants may be limited by your service provider. For the maximum number of participants in a conference call, contact your service provider technical support. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 Dial a number by performing one of the following actions:
. If If you want to make a call by directly en-
tering a number, Then perform the following actions:
If you want to make a call by using Speed Dial, a Tap
. b Enter the phone number and tap perform the following actions:
. 67 MN005019A01-B Chapter 6: Calling If Then a Tap b Tap and hold the key that corresponds to
. a contact number that you want to call. If you want to call a recently called num-
ber, perform the following actions:
a Tap b From the list, tap the contact that you
. want to call. c Tap perform the following actions:
a Tap b From the list, tap the contact that you
. want to call. c When the contact displays, tap next to the number. If you want to make a call by searching the contacts already saved on your de-
vice, 3 While in your call, tap
. The first person is put on hold. 4 Dial the second person. See step 2. 5 Tap to join the two calls together. The device screen states Conference Call and everyone can talk and hear one another. 6 Tap to end the call. 6.3 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset You can follow this procedure to answer calls by using a Bluetooth headset. When you receive a phone call, the Incoming Call screen opens, displaying the caller ID and any additional information about the caller that is in the contact application. Prerequisites: Ensure your LEX device is paired with the Bluetooth accessory. See Pairing LEX with Bluetooth Devices on page 59. Procedure:
1 When a call arrives, tap the Call button on the Bluetooth headset to answer the call. 2 To silence the ringer before answering the call, press the volume down button on the side of device. 3 To end the call press the Call button on the Bluetooth headset. 68 MN005019A01-B Chapter 6: Calling All incoming calls are recorded in the Phone (
miss a call, you receive a notification.
) application, in the Recents tab. If you 6.4 Call Settings In Call settings, you can adjust display options, sounds and vibration, select quick responses, and many more. NOTICE: Not all options are available for all configurations. Call settings are located at Settings. 69 MN005019A01-B Chapter 7: Messaging Chapter 7 Messaging LEX device can be used to send and receive text messages on the service provider network. The LEX device uses the Phone application. NOTICE: If your Organization requires a Public Safety Experience (PSX) for text messaging, contact your device technician. The LEX device supports the following types of text messages:
Text messages You can send and receive simple messages containing text to other mobile phones (also known as SMS). Multimedia messages You can send and receive text messages with pictures, video, and/or sound to other mobile phones
(also known as MMS). NOTICE: Messaging service availability depends on your network and service plan. 7.1 Sending Messages You can use this procedure to send text and multimedia messages. Procedure:
1 From Home screen tap
. 2 Tap 3 In the To field, type a name, a phone number, or an email address. As you enter text in the field, matching contacts appear. 4 Tap the contact from the list. 5 In the Type an SMS message field, type your message. 6 You can add the media of your choice by tapping and choosing one of the available options. The available options are as follows:
Table 13: Message Media Type Icons 70 Description Emojis - Attach a small digital image or icon to express an idea or emotion. Camera - Take a pictures or record video and share. Media - Share photos, media, and files. MN005019A01-B Chapter 7: Messaging Icons Description Microphone - Record audio and share. Location - Snap your location and share. 7 Send the message by tapping
. 71 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios Chapter 8 Collaboration with LMR Radios Radio Services is a free application available on the device that enables the LEX device to connect with a Land Mobile Radio (LMR). You can connect your LEX device with an LMR radio. The supported LMR radios are as follows:
Table 14: ASTRO (APX) Radios Supported by LEX L11 Release R17.01.00 and Later Releases of the Following ASTRO APX Radio Models APX 6000 APX 6000XE APX 7000 APX 7000XE APX 8000 APX 8000XE Table 15: TETRA Radios Supported by LEX L11 TETRA Radio Models TETRA MTP3000 series radios TETRA MTP6000 series radios When in collaborative mode with a TETRA or APX radio, the LEX device supports both half-duplex private calls and group PTT calls sent to and from the TETRA or APX radio. NOTICE:
If you cannot access features described in this chapter, contact your device technician for more information. TETRA radios need to be provisioned to use the LEX L11 device as an accessory. 8.1 Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Radio for PTT Communications The LEX device supports Push-To-Talk (PTT) communications in two different modes PTT through Land Mobile Radio (LMR), or Broadband PTT through PSX PTT solution. The LEX device can operate in only one of these modes at a time. You can switch between the two modes using the PSX Cockpit application. NOTICE: For more information on using the PSX Cockpit application and the PSX Push-to-Talk application, see the PSX User Guide and/or WAVE 7000 Push-to-Talk for Mobile Devices manual. Prerequisites: Obtain the PSX Cockpit application. 72 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios NOTICE: To access the PSX Cockpit sidebar menu settings, you must log on to the PSX Cockpit application. If needed, contact your Motorola Solutions representative to obtain an account. Procedure:
1 Swipe the Home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 On the Apps screen, tap
. 3 Display the PSX Cockpit sidebar menu by tapping 4 In the PSX Cockpit sidebar menu, tap the PTT that you currently use. Figure 12: PSX Cockpit Sidebar Menu 5 In the Push to Talk screen, choose the PTT that you want to use:
If you want to use the LMR radio for PTT communications, select Radio. If you want to make Broadband PTT calls through the PSX PTT application, select WAVE. Figure 13: Push to Talk Screen Choosing LMR or WAVE not only sets your choice for PTT functionality, but configures the emergency button. Selecting Radio enables the Radio Services application on the LEX and disables the PSX PTT application on the LEX automatically. 73 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios Selecting WAVE automatically enables the PSX PTT application on the LEX and disables the Radio Services application on the LEX. 6 Tap OK. 8.2 Pairing Radio with the LEX Device You can pair the LEX device with a Land Mobile Radio (LMR) to send and receive PTT calls. The devices remember each other and automatically resume connection when they are on and within connection range. Prerequisites: Ensure the following:
Verify whether your LMR radio is supported for pairing with the LEX device. For the list of supported radios, see Collaboration with LMR Radios on page 72. Turn on Bluetooth on the LEX device and on the radio. For more information, see Enabling Bluetooth on page 58. Ensure the LEX device is not paired with any previously paired Bluetooth devices. For more information, see Managing Bluetooth Devices on page 59. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 From the Apps screen, tap Radio Services
. Figure 14: Secure Pairing Screen 3 In the Secure Pairing window, tap Pair. 4 In the Bluetooth window, set the Bluetooth slidebar to the ON position. 5 Tap Refresh and select the radio from the list of available devices. 74 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios NOTICE: Ensure the LMR Radio is in discoverable mode. The Bluetooth pairing prompt appears. 6 Compare the pairing code on the LEX device with the code on the LMR radio and tap Pair. 7 On the LMR radio, select Accept. The LMR radio is paired with your LEX device. 8.3 Unpairing Radio from the LEX Device You can follow this procedure to unpair the LEX device from the Land Mobile Radio (LMR). Procedure:
1 Start the Radio Services application. 2 In the Radio Services window, tap Unpair and tap OK. Figure 15: Radio Services Overflow Menu 8.4 Selecting Zones and Channels You can select zones and channels to communicate with other users. Prerequisites: Ensure your Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is successfully paired with the LEX device. Procedure:
1 Start the Radio Services application. 2 Select a zone by tapping a zone of your choice. The Channel selection screen appears, displaying a list of channels available for that zone. 75 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios Figure 16: Channel Selection Screen 3 Navigate to the parent folder by tapping on the left corner of the current folder name. Figure 17: Navigation in the Channel Selection Screen 4 Select a channel by tapping a channel of your choice. 8.5 Adding Favorite Talkgroups You can create a list of favorite talkgroups to facilitate contact with other users. Prerequisites: Ensure the Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is successfully paired with the LEX device. Procedure:
1 Start the Radio Services application. 2 In the Radio Services window, tap and select Edit favorites. 3 Tap 4 Tap + and add a talkgroup by performing one of the following actions:
Scroll through the list and select the check box next to the talkgroup you want to add to Favorites. 76 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios Search for a talkgroup by entering its name in the search field at the top of the screen and select the check box next to the talkgroup. 5 Return to the Radio Services main screen by tapping
. 8.6 Selecting Talkgroups You can change talkgroups within a zone by using the talkgroup rocker. For the exact location of the talkgroup rocker on the LEX device, see Device Overview on page 24. NOTICE: You cannot change zones with the talkgroup rocker. If you select a talkgroup added to a Favorites list, the rocker moves in the Favorites list and selects next/previous Favorite talkgroup. You receive a tone feedback on each press. When you reach the beginning or the end of a list of talkgroups, you receive a different tone feedback. NOTICE: If you cannot access this feature on your device, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 If you want to move to the next talkgroup, press and release the talkgroup rocker in the direction of the display. 2 If you want to move to a previous group, press and move the talkgroup rocker in the direction away from the display. 8.7 Sending PTT Audio You can follow this procedure to start and stop sending PTT audio on the LEX device. The LEX PTT button serves to send audio. When you press the LEX L11 PTT button, the LEX microphone is always used for communication. NOTICE: You can also send audio by pressing and holding the PTT button on the Land Mobile Radio (LMR). In that case, when the LEX device is paired with a TETRA radio and the LMR PTT button is pressed, the LEX microphone is used to send audio. When the LEX device is paired with an ASTRO radio and the LMR PTT button is pressed, the ASTRO microphone is used to transmit audio. Procedure:
On the LEX device, press and hold the PTT button. For the location of the PTT button on the LEX device, see Device Overview on page 24. The LEX device transmits audio as long as you press the PTT button. 8.8 Selecting Audio Routing Options The PTT audio can be routed to different sound outputs for the incoming and outgoing audio. You can select loudspeaker, headset, or earpiece to route audio. Prerequisites: Ensure that the Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is successfully paired with the LEX device. 77 MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios NOTICE: The LEX loudspeaker is the default audio output. Procedure:
1 Start the Radio Services application. 2 Choose the way of audio routing:
NOTICE:
You can only select headset if the wired 3.5 mm headset is plugged in. You can only select earpiece if the wired 3.5 mm headset is not plugged in. If If you want to select loudspeaker, If you want to select a normal handheld speaker/earpiece, If you want to select headset,
. Then perform the following actions:
a Tap b Select perform the following actions:
a Tap
. b Select plug in the 3.5 mm jack of a wired headset. NOTICE: Unplugging the 3.5mm jack automatically selects the out-
put used before the headset was plugged in (loudspeaker or ear-
piece). 8.8.1 Adjusting Sound Volume You can perform this procedure to adjust radio sound settings on the LEX device. You can choose different audio routing options. You can also modify sound settings from the Land Mobile Radio (LMR). For more information, see the respective LMR user manual. Prerequisites: Ensure that your LMR radio is successfully paired with the LEX device. Procedure:
1 Adjust the sound volume by performing one of the following actions:
If If you want to adjust volume using the Volume button* on the device, Then perform the following actions:
If you want to increase volume, press the upper part of the Volume button. If you want to decrease volume, press the lower part of the Volume button. If you want to adjust sound volume in the Radio Services application, perform the following actions:
78 If Then MN005019A01-B Chapter 8: Collaboration with LMR Radios a From the Home screen, tap b In the Radio Services window, tap c Set the radio volume by adjusting the Ra-
. dio volume slidebar. Figure 18: Radio Volume Slidebar NOTICE: *See the Volume button in Device Overview on page 24. 8.9 Emergency Mode on LEX Device Paired with LMR When Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is paired with a LEX device and the Emergency button is pressed (on any device where LMR is present), the LEX device reacts based on what LMR channel the user is on and what Emergency Mode that channel is assigned. The LEX device initiates an emergency by pressing the emergency button on the LEX device. See Enabling Emergency Mode on page 80. The following types of Emergency Modes are available and are configurable by your technician:
Emergency Alert - A LEX device that is on a channel provisioned with this Emergency Mode sends an alert over the channel. Emergency Call - A LEX device on a channel provisioned with this Emergency Mode gives the user that pressed the Emergency button (the initiator) the top priority on the channel. Emergency Alert with LMR Emergency call - A LEX device that is on channel provisioned with this Emergency Mode sends an alert and give the user top priority on the channel. Silent Emergency Alert - A LEX device that is on a channel provisioned with this Emergency Mode silently sends an alert over the channel. When the LEX device is paired with an LMR radio and an emergency is activated, it is equivalent to pressing the LMR emergency button. If you are not paired with an LMR radio or the emergency fails
(for example out of range), you can use the PSX Cockpit application to switch between the PSX PTT app and LMR. See Switching Between PSX PTT App and LMR Radio for PTT Communications on page 72. For more details on emergency, see Emergency Services on page 80, and the WAVE 7000 Push-to-Talk for Mobile Devices manual. 79 MN005019A01-B Chapter 9: Emergency Services Chapter 9 Emergency Services This chapter describes emergency services available on the LEX L11 device. The LEX L11 allows you to enter emergency mode in a critical situation. You can also make emergency calls from the device. 9.1 Emergency Mode Alert Settings Emergency Mode indicates a critical situation, and triggers actions in applications, for example in Public Safety Experience (PSX) applications. The emergency alert signal overrides any other communication on the LEX device. NOTICE:
Contact your System Administrator to set up other emergency alert notifications if required. If no application supporting the emergency mode is installed, pushing the Emergency button does not trigger any actions. Initiate an emergency call only The following are examples of actions that can be triggered in applications that support the emergency mode when you press the Emergency button:
Send an SMS including your location Initiate a call and SMS NOTICE: For more information on the PSX Cockpit Emergency button, see the PSX User Guide. 9.1.1 Enabling Emergency Mode Emergency Mode indicates a critical situation. The emergency alert signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel of the radio. NOTICE: For information how to exit the emergency mode and what actions are triggered by pressing the Emergency button, contact your device administrator. Procedure:
Press and hold the Emergency button for more than three seconds. For the exact location of the Emergency button on the LEX device, see Device Overview on page 24. 9.2 Emergency Calls Emergency numbers are pre-programmed in your phone. They can vary by country and by the type of communication network. The pre-programmed emergency numbers may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. For additional information, contact your system administrator. 80 MN005019A01-B Chapter 9: Emergency Services If your phone has settings to disable Caller ID (by selecting Phone Settings Calls Additional settings Caller ID), be aware that disabling Caller ID prevents an the emergency operator from obtaining caller information needed to assist you. If you disable Caller ID for a specific call, you must enable it again immediately after that call. 9.2.1 Making Emergency Calls Procedure:
Make an emergency call on a LEX device by performing one of the following actions:
If If you need to make an emergency call on a locked LEX device, If you need to make an emergency call on an unlocked LEX device, Then perform the following actions:
On the locked device screen, tap EMER-
GENCY to display the dialer. Enter the emergency number (112 and 911 are always available). Tap to initiate the call. perform the following actions:
a On the Home screen, tap
. b Tap c Enter the emergency phone number. to display the dialer. d Tap to initiate the call. 9.3 Configuring Emergency Broadcast Alert Settings Configuring the emergency broadcast settings allows you to receive warnings about dangerous weather, missing people, or any threats to your life and/or health. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 From the Apps screen, tap 3 Select the check boxes next to the settings that you want to enable. 4 If you want to set an alert reminder, tap Alert reminder and, in the list, select a radio button next Sound Emergency broadcasts. to the setting of your choice. The following settings are available:
Once Every 2 minutes Every 15 minutes Off 81 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE Chapter 10 IMS VoLTE In this chapter, the term "IMS" is used to indicate IP Multimedia Subsystem, which is a type of communication network. You can ask your system administrator if that type of network is implemented on your phone. IMS supports voice, video, and conference calling, and a variety of other multimedia services. IMS voice calls use the standard Android dialer and Contacts application. Emergency calling is available (See Emergency Services on page 80). The following additional features might be enabled on your LEX device if it operates on an IMS network
(contact your system administrator for more information):
IMS Video Calls IMS Conference Calls IMS Voice Mail IMS Supplementary Services IMS Messaging (SMS and MMS) IMS Clear Tone - An optional IMS feature enabled by the agency to notify the user that they are on a clear call (non-secure). NOTICE: If your Organization must make calls in a secure (encrypted) environment, see Public Safety Experience (PSX) Applications on page 103. 10.1 Making IMS VoLTE Calls You can follow these steps to make a Voice over LTE (VoLTE) voice call. If your system supports VoLTE calling, users can make and receive calls to, and from other users, over an LTE IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 In the To field, type a name or phone number. As you enter text, matching contacts appear. Tap
. a contact from the contact list. User can also initiate calls to contacts from the following actions:
If... You want to call a contact, You want to call a contact in your favorites, You want to make a call with the dialer, Then... Tap Tap Tap
. 82 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 3 Tap to initiate the call. If... You want to turn on the speakerphone, You want to mute the call, 4 Tap to end the call. Then... Tap Tap
. 10.2 Making IMS Video Calls If your system supports VoLTE, users can make and receive video calls to, and from other users, over an LTE IMS network. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Prerequisites: If you are making video calls, user must enable the Video Calling setting. See Enabling IMS Video Calling on page 85. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 In the To field, type a name or phone number. As you enter text, matching contacts appear. User can also initiate calls to contacts from the following actions:
If... Then... You want to call a contact in your favorites, Tap Favorites
. You want to call a contact in your history list, Tap History
. You want to make a call with the dialer, You want to call a contact, 3 Tap to initiate the call. If... You want to turn on the speakerphone, You want to mute the call, Tap Tap Then... Tap Tap
. 83 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 4 Tap Video Call. The call is placed on hold. 5 From the Which type of call window, select a call type. NOTICE: While ViLTE call in progress, each user will see video on their respective device for full duplex video. In case of send only or receive only, the contact picture displays. Voice Only - Audio Only Video Transmit - Video Send only Video Receive - Video Receive only VT - Video send/receive 6 Tap to end the call. 10.2.1 Receiving IMS Video Calls If your private system supports VoLTE calls, users can receive a video call from another user. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Procedure:
1 When callee receives a video call, user swipes one of the following choices from the device screen:
Voice Only - Audio Only Video Transmit - Video Send only Video Receive - Video Receive only 84 VT - Video send/receive Figure 19: Receiving Video Call MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE NOTICE: While ViLTE call in progress, each user will see video on their respective device for full duplex video. In case of send only or receive only, the contact picture displays. 2 Tap to end the call. 10.2.2 Enabling IMS Video Calling You can use this procedure to configure Video Calling. If you are unable to configure Video Call settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Video Calling allows the user to send and receive Video Calls. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From the drop-down menu 3 Tap Turn on Video Calling to enable.
, select Settings Calls. 85 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.3 Making IMS Multi-Party Conference Calls You can use this procedure to create a conference phone session with up to three people on the LEX device. If your private system supports Voice over LTE (VoLTE) calls, you can make and receive conference calls to and from other users. If you are unable to use Multi-Party Conference calling, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 In the To field, type a name or phone number to add recipients. As you enter text, matching
. contacts appear. Tap from the contact list. You can also initiate calls to contacts from the following actions:
If... You want to call a contact, Then... tap
. You want to call a contact in your favorites, tap Favorites
. You want to call a contact in your history list, tap History
. You want to make a call with the dialer, tap
. 3 Tap to initiate the call. If... You want to turn on the speakerphone, You want to mute the call, Then... tap tap
. 4 When the call connects, tap 5 Add another recipient by performing steps in step 2. 6 Tap to initiate the call. When the call connects, the first call is placed on hold and the second call is active. 7 Tap 8 Tap to rotate between the individual calls. to create a conference call. Calls are rotated starting with the first call. This allows you to speak privately to one party. Tap to rotate to the next party. When the rotation is complete, you are placed back into conference mode and all calls are active. 86 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.4 IMS Voicemail This section provides information on VoiceMail Services where LEX device users can receive VoiceMail messages from other users that have connectivity to the operator. If you are unable to use VoiceMail services on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Voicemail is a method of storing voice messages electronically for later retrieval by intended recipients. Your system administrator enables voicemail services and configures the voicemail number. Users cannot change the assigned voicemail number on the LEX device. If VoiceMail is enabled, the user can configure settings in the LEX device that may affect the way VoiceMail will operate. NOTICE: When switching between networks, you LEX device phone number is not the same. Contact your system administrator for further details. You can initiate the following actions:
Leave a voicemail message. Retrieve a voicemail message. Select, play, and manage (create/modify greeting/delete messages). Receive a voicemail notification. Configure message sound and vibrate. See Enabling IMS VoiceMail Notification Sounds on page 87. Manage voicemail settings. See Enabling IMS Call Forwarding on page 89. IMPORTANT:
If you change the Call Forwarding setting on the LEX device to a number different from the voicemail number received from the device management, the calls will no longer route to the voicemail server. In some deployments, the voicemail number is not received from the device management. 10.4.1 Enabling IMS VoiceMail Notification Sounds You can use this procedure to configure VoiceMail notification sounds.VoiceMail allows you to send and receive voice messages with notification sounds. If you are unable to configure VoiceMail settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu 3 Complete the following actions:
, select Settings Calls VoiceMail. Tap Sound and select a notification sound. Tap Vibrate to enable vibration on received voicemail messages. 87 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.5 IMS Supplementary Services This section provides information on Supplementary Services over IMS for the LEX device on a private network. Supplementary services are available on IMS networks and provides the user with configurable device settings to manage calling capabilities on the LEX device. NOTICE: On some networks, this feature may be only partially available or not available at all. Contact your Agency Device Administrator for more information. All supplementary service configurations managed from the device are not saved on the server. If a LEX device requires a reset, the configured settings default to the system configuration. If unable to configure supplementary services on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. You may configure some of the following supplementary services on the LEX device:
NOTICE: Some of these supplementary services may not be available for all networks. Call Hold - During an active call, the LEX user can place the active call on hold. To configure call hold on your LEX device, see Placing IMS VoLTE Call on Hold on page 88. Communication Waiting - During an active call, if another caller calls your LEX device, the user has the option to Answer or Decline the incoming call. To configure Call Waiting on the LEX device, see Enabling IMS Call Waiting on page 89. Call Forwarding - User can forward incoming calls to the LEX device to a different number. To configure Call Forwarding on the LEX device, see Enabling IMS Call Forwarding on page 89 . Call Barring - User can prevent incoming, outgoing, or both types of calls from calling your phone. To configure Call Barring on the LEX device, see Enabling IMS Call Barring on page 90. Originating Identification Restriction (OIR), also known as Caller ID Restriction - User can withold their identity (ID) from being displayed to another LEX device when making a call over IMS, see Enabling and Disabling Caller ID in an IMS System on page 90. 10.5.1 Placing IMS VoLTE Call on Hold You can use this procedure to place an active IMS VoLTE call on hold. If you are unable to place calls on hold on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Procedure:
1 During an active call, tap the Hold 2 To resume the active call, tap the Hold icon again. icon to place the call on hold. NOTICE: The Hold button is not available during an Emergency call. 88 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.5.2 Enabling IMS Call Waiting You can use this procedure to enable or disable Call Waiting settings. If you are unable to configure call waiting on your LEX device, contact your system administrator. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu 3 Tap to enable Call Waiting.
, select Settings Calls Additional Settings. 10.5.3 Enabling IMS Call Forwarding You can follow this procedure to enable IMS Call Forwarding. Call Forwarding immediately redirects calls intended for your LEX device to another number. You can still make outgoing calls when this feature is turned on. If you turn off all Call Forwarding features, the device sets all conditional call forwarding to the voicemail number and the calls will route to the voicemail server. NOTICE:
This feature may not be available on all networks. If you are unable to configure Call Forwarding settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. The default call forwarding number is preconfigured to the voicemail number. If you change the Call Forwarding setting to a number different from the voicemail number received from the device management, the calls will no longer route to the voicemail server. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu 3 Enable the settings of your choice.
, select Settings Calls Call Forwarding Voice. The available settings are:
Table 16: Calling Accounts Setting Setting Always Forward Forward Implicitly Deactivate All Description All incoming calls are sent to the number you specify; your phone does not ring. This option overrides all other forwarding options. Calls are forwarded when you are on the phone. All call forwarding options are disabled. All calls are sent to the voicemail num-
ber. 89 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 10.5.4 Enabling IMS Call Barring You can use this procedure to configure Call Barring. Call Barring allows you to restrict certain types of incoming and outgoing calls from your LEX device. NOTICE:
Barring of only video or only audio is not supported. This feature may not be available on all networks. If you are unable to configure Call Barring settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu
, select Settings Calls Call Barring. You can configure the following settings:
Outgoing call barring Allows you to bar outgoing International and Roaming audio and video calls. Incoming call barring Allows you to bar incoming Roaming audio and video calls. 3 Configure the Outgoing call barring setting by performing the following actions:
a Tap Outgoing call barring and select one of the following options:
Off Outgoing call International roam call International call b In the Input Password window, enter call barring password and tap OK. 4 Configure the Incoming call barring setting by performing the following actions:
a Tap Incoming call barring, enter password, and select one of the following options:
Off Roaming All b In the Input Password window, enter call barring password and tap OK. 10.5.5 Enabling and Disabling Caller ID in an IMS System You can use this procedure to configure the Caller ID restriction on the LEX device. Origination Identifcation Restriction (OIR), also known as Caller ID restriction, allows you to restrict the user identity on outgoing calls to other callers directly from the LEX device. NOTICE: This feature may not be available on all networks. If you are unable to configure the Caller ID restriction settings on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 90 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE 2 From drop-down menu 3 Tap Caller ID and tap to disable.
, select Settings Calls Additional Settings. 10.6 IMS Messaging If your system and LEX device support text messaging, users can make and receive text messages to, and from other users, over an LTE IMS network. If you are unable to text messages on the LEX device, contact your system administrator. Prerequisites: Users can install messaging apps from the Google Play Store to use on the IMS network. If you are sending to multiple users, you must configure the Group Messaging setting before sending a text. See Enabling IMS Group Messaging on page 91. NOTICE:
For IMS messaging, you can use the Messaging app on the device. Multi-media messages (camera, recorded voice, images, and so on) are not supported in the IMS network. Procedure:
1 From Home or Apps screen, tap
. 2 In the bottom-right, tap 3 In the To field, type a name or phone number. As you enter text in the field, matching contacts
. appear. Tap the contact from the list. If Group Messaging is enabled, you can add a contact or multiple contacts by tapping Top Contacts. 4 Tap 5 Tap the Send message box and type a message. Messages are limited to 160 characters. When the limit is approached, a counter displays, above the Send icon, showing how many characters are left. If the limit is reached and the user keeps typing, a new message is created, which is joined with its predecessors when received. 6 Send a message by tapping
. 10.6.1 Enabling IMS Group Messaging You can follow this procedure to enable group messaging on the device. Access to the SMS and MMS settings are available through the Messaging settings on the device. Preference settings allow you to configure Notifications and Group Messaging options on the device. This option is turned off as a default. 91 MN005019A01-B Chapter 10: IMS VoLTE NOTICE: MMS group messaging may not be available for all networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 From drop-down menu 3 To enable SMS group messaging, tap Send an SMS reply to all recipients and get individual
, select Settings Advanced Group Messaging. replies (mass text). 4 To enable MMS group messaging, tap Send an MMS reply to all recipients (group MMS). 92 MN005019A01-B Applications Chapter 11 Applications This chapter contains information on applications available on the LEX L11 device. NOTICE: For information on applications available on your LEX device and application limitations related to specific networks your LEX device operates in, contact your Agency Device Administrator. 11.1 Applications Table 17: LEX L11 Applications Icon Description AirWatch Agent: allows to provision the device and perform ongoing management procedures. AirWatch Remote Management: allows you to connect to end-user devices in order to perform maintenace and troubleshooting procedures. Android System Webview: allows Android apps to display web content. Calculator : provides the basic and scientific arithmetic functions. Camera: use to take photos. Chrome: use to access Internet. Clock: use to set an alarm, stopwatch, or timer. Contacts: use to manage contact information. CRYPTR Manager: The CRYPTR micro en-
cryption card is used for voice encryption in fea-
tures such as data and phone over Virtual Pri-
vate Network (VPN) and Push-to-Talk (PTT) communication. Downloads: lists all downloaded files. File Manager: use to view and manage files. Gallery: use to view photos stored on the de-
vice. Gmail: use to send and receive emails. Google Calendar: use to manage events and appointments. 93 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications Icon 94 Description Google Drive: access to files anywhere through secure cloud storage and file backup for your photos, videos, files and more. Google Duo: use to make video calls. Google Keep: use to create, store, and catego-
rize notes, lists, reminders, images, audio, and many more. Google Maps: find local businesses, view maps and get driving directions. Google PDF viewer: use to view .pdf files. Google Play Movies & TV: buy or rent movies and TV shows. Google Play Services: updates Google appli-
cations. Google Photos: use to view photos stored on the device. Google Play Music: access music stored on the device. Google Play Store: Google app store for An-
droid devices with games, applications, movies, and more. Google Search: allows you to find what you need on the web and on your device. Google Street View: provides panoramic view of many streets in the world. Google TalkBack: helps vision-impaired users interact with their devices. Google Text-to-speech: reads the text on your screen aloud. Google Translate: online language translation service. Instantly translates text and web pages. Messages: send SMS and MMS messages. Phone: use to make phone calls. Radio Management Link Client (RM Link):
enables connecting the device to a remote host computer for staging, firmware installation, ap-
plication installation, and application removal by technical support. See the Radio Management Online Help for more information on the RM Ap-
plication. Settings: use Settings to configure the device. Icon MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications Description YouTube: you can use this app to view videos and music. 11.2 Camera This section provides information on taking photos and recording video files by using the Camera application available on your LEX device. 11.2.1 Taking Photos You can take photos in normal or panoramic mode. Procedure:
1 Open the Camera application. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
If If you want to take a picture in normal mode, If you want to take a picture in panoramic mode, Then perform the following actions:
a Open the mode selection bar located at the bottom-right corner of the screen by tapping Figure 20: Mode Selection Bar
. b Select c If you want to adjust camera settings, tap
. and select the settings of your choice. d Frame the subject on screen. e To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. The zoom controls appear on the screen. f Take a picture by tapping perform the following actions:
. 95 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications If Then a Open the mode selection bar located at the bottom-right corner of the screen by tapping Figure 21: Mode Selection Bar
. b Tap c Start capturing the picture from the left-
. most edge of the image and move to-
wards the rightmost edge. d Stop capturing by tapping
. 11.2.2 Recording Videos This section describes using the Camera application for recording video. Procedure:
1 Open the Camera application. 2 Open the mode selection bar located at the bottom-right side of the window by tapping
. Figure 22: Mode Selection Bar 3 Select
. 4 If you want to adjust video settings, tap and select the settings of your choice. 5 Start recording by tapping 6 To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. The zoom controls appear on the screen. 7 Finish recording by tapping
. 96 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 11.3 Gallery Gallery is used to manage your photos and videos. NOTICE: The device supports the following image formats: JPEG, GIF, PNG, and BMP. You can use Gallery to:
View photos. Play videos. Perform basic editing of photos. Set photos as a wallpaper. Set photos as a contact photo. Share photos and videos. The Gallery application is located at Apps screen Gallery contains all photos and videos stored on the microSD card and in the internal memory. 11.3.1 Albums Albums are groups of images and videos in folders. Photos and videos grouped together in an album are listed in a chronologically ordered grid. The name of the album displays at the top of the screen. 11.3.1.1 Sharing Albums Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap and hold an album until it becomes highlighted. 4 Tap
. Share applications are displayed. 5 Select the application that you want to use. 6 Follow the instructions within the selected application. 11.3.1.2 Checking Album Information Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap and hold an album until it becomes highlighted. 97 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications
. 4 Tap 5 Tap Details. 11.3.1.3 Deleting Albums Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the three horizontal lines in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap and hold an album until it becomes highlighted. 4 Tap 5 Delete the album by tapping OK. 11.3.2 Photos In the Gallery application, you may view, rotate, crop, share, and delete photos. 11.3.2.1 Viewing and Browsing Photos Procedure:
. 1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap an album of your choice. 4 Tap a photo. 5 To view the next or previous photo in the album, swipe left or right. 6 To view the photo in upright (portrait) or sideways (landscape) orientation, turn the LEX device. The photo is displayed (but not saved) in the new orientation. 7 View the controls by tapping the photo. 8 Zoom in by double-tapping the screen, or zoom in or out by pinching two fingers together or spreading them apart. 9 View parts that are not in view by dragging the photo. 11.3.2.2 Rotating Photos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to rotate. 4 View the controls by tapping the photo. 98 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 5 Open the editing view by tapping
. 6 Tap
. 7 Rotate the photo by tapping
. The photo rotates 90 clockwise. Each tap rotates the photo another 90. 8 Save the changes by tapping SAVE. 11.3.2.3 Cropping Photos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to crop. 4 View the controls by tapping the photo. 5 Edit the photo by tapping
. 6 Tap
. 7 Enter the cropping mode by tapping
. The cropping grid appears. 8 To crop the photo, perform one of the following actions:
If If you want to crop the photo manually, Then perform the following actions:
a Adjust the endpoints to select the portion of the photo to crop. If you want to choose automatic cropping dimensions,
. b Tap perform the following actions:
a Tap 1:1. b If you want to view the original photo, tap Original. c Confirm by tapping d Save changes by tapping SAVE. 11.3.2.4 Setting Photos as Contact Icons Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 99 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to set as a contact icon. 4 Tap the photo. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Set picture as. 7 Select Contact photo and select a contact of your choice. 8 Tap Crop picture. 9 Crop the photo accordingly as described in Cropping Photos on page 99. 10 Tap SAVE. 11.3.2.5 Sharing Photos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to share. 4 Tap the photo or photos of your choice. 5 Tap 6 Tap the application to use for sharing the selected photo. 11.3.2.6 Deleting Photos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the photo you want to delete. 4 Tap the photo or photos of your choice. 5 Tap 6 Confirm by tapping OK. 11.3.3 Videos In the Gallery application, you can view videos saved on the microSD card and share videos. 11.3.3.1 Watching Videos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 100 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 3 Tap the album that contains the video you want to watch. 4 Tap the video you want to watch. 5 Tap 6 Select the application you want to use to watch the video. 7 To see the playback controls, tap the screen. Figure 23: Video Playback Controls 8 To return to the previous screen, double-tap
. 11.3.3.2 Sharing Videos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the video you want to share. 4 Tap the video. 5 Tap
. The Share via menu appears. 6 Tap the application you want to use to share the selected video and follow the on-screen instructions. 11.3.3.3 Deleting Videos Procedure:
1 Open the Gallery application by tapping
. 101 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen and select Albums. 3 Tap the album that contains the video you want to delete. 4 Tap the video. 5 Tap 6 Delete the video by tapping OK. 11.4 Turning On the Flashlight Procedure:
1 Open the Notifications panel by swiping the screen down from the Status bar. 2 Tap
. 11.5 Taking Screen Captures You can take screen captures of the currently displayed screen. Procedure:
Press the POWER BUTTON and the VOLUME DOWN button simultaneously. The screen capture is saved in the device memory. 11.6 Managing Downloads You can download, install, view your applications and media files, when your device is connected to the Internet through Wi-Fi or service provider network. You can download files from Google, or other sources, open, and edit them. Procedure:
1 Manage application downloads by tapping Downloads 2 From the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen, select the type of file you want to
. manage. 3 Open an item by tapping it. 4 If you want to share a downloaded item, tap and hold the selected item. a Tap b In the Share via menu, select the application you want use to share the downloaded item. 5 If you want to delete downloaded items, check items you want to delete and tap
. 102 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications 11.7 Exploring Files You can use the File Manager application to navigate to folders/files, edit them, and create new ones. Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 Tap
. The main screen appears, displaying the storage available on your device. 3 Tap the folder you want to open. 4 To perform more actions in the File Manager application, tap the three dots in the bottom-left corner of the screen. The following options are available:
Properties the properties of a selected folder or file, for example type, size, modified date, and others. Refresh refreshes the application. New folder allows you to create a new folder. New file allows you to create a new file. Select all selects all folders and files. Deselect all deselects all folders and files. Add to bookmarks adds folders and/or files to the bookmarks. Add shortcut creates a shortcut to a selected folder or file. Set as home 11.8 Public Safety Experience (PSX) Applications The following PSX applications are available from Motorola Solutions, as part of an end-to-end solution that also includes servers to manage licensing, contacts, security, and settings:
NOTICE: To obtain the Public Safety Experience solution, contact Motorola Solutions Support. PSX Mapping A mapping application that integrates with PSX Messenger. Allows you to present devices on a map in near real time along with the location of those devices. It also allows performing additional actions, such as navigating to the selected user, or instantly starting a call. PSX Messenger A messaging application that integrates with PSX Home Screen and PSX Mapping. Allows you to send text messages to individuals and groups. You can attach photos, video and audio recordings, and maps showing your current location or another selected location. Taking photos, recording audio, viewing maps or using other applications is possible without closing the Messenger. PSX PTT Turns your LTE device into a multi-channel push-to-talk (PTT) handset for fully secure, real-time PTT voice communications anywhere you have a network connection. PSX Secure Calling Provides Secure Voice over IP (SVoIP) communication between individuals in an agency with option of deploying connectivity to an existing PBX. 103 MN005019A01-B Chapter 11: Applications PSX Cockpit PSX Cockpit mobile app client that bundles multiple Intelligent MiddleWare (IMW) functions for LTE devices. It is a central application that manages initial configuration, setting statuses, presence information, triggering emergency mode, clearing emergency mode, and other central functions for PSX applications. 104 MN005019A01-B Accessories Chapter 12 Accessories The LEX L11 device can be used with Motorola Solutions accessories. 12.1 Accessories This section lists supported accessories and their part numbers. NOTICE: To ensure regulatory compliance, you must use only Motorola Solutions approved, supplied, or replacement batteries and accessories. Carry Accessories Table 18: Carry Accessories Accessory Name Accessory kit, vehicular charger, with suction base LEX L11 Carry Case with Peter Jones Stud Part Number PMLN7912A PMLN7845A Chargers Table 19: Chargers (USB-C) Charger Type MSI in-box supplied travel charger MSI optional Quickcharge travel charger (with PD/QC4) MSI Multi-Unit Charger Part Number PS000150A31 US/JPN Plug PS000150A32 EU Plug PS000150A33 UK/HK Plug PS000150A34 AU/NZ Plug PS000150A35 ARG Plug PS000150A36 CHN Plug PS000150A37 KOR Plug PS000150A38 BZL Plug PS000278A01 US/JPN Plug PS000278A02 EU Plug PS000278A03 UK/HK Plug PS000278A04 AU/NZ Plug PS000278A05 ARG Plug PS000278A06 CHN Plug PS000278A07 KOR Plug PS000278A08 BZL Plug PMPN4341A EU Power Cord PMPN4342A UK/HK Power Cord PMPN4343A Aus/NZ Power Cord 105 MN005019A01-B Chapter 12: Accessories Charger Type Part Number MSI Desktop Charger PMPN4344A Argentina Power Cord PMPN4345A CHN Power Cord PMPN4346A KOR Power Cord PMPN4347A BZL Power Cord PMPN4348A JPN Power Cord PMPN4349A US Power Cord PMPN4351A EU Plug PMPN4352A UK/HK Plug PMPN4353A AU/NZ Plug PMPN4354A ARG Plug PMPN4355A CHN Plug PMPN4356A KOR Plug PMPN4357A BZL Plug PMPN4358A JPN Plug PMPN4359A US Plug MSI Vehicle Power Adapter (with PD) PMLN7779A Battery Capacity
(mAh) 2500mAh Battery Nominal Voltage
(V) 3.7V Battery Type Country of Origin Part Num-
ber LI-ION Malaysia 5000mAh 3.7V LI-ION Malaysia PMNN454 5 PMNN454 6 Batteries Table 20: Batteries Descrip-
tion Build-/
Vintage PRE-PI-
LOT PRE-PI-
LOT Standard battery
(STD) High-ca-
pacity bat-
tery (HI-
CAP) 106 MN005019A01-B Maintenance and Troubleshooting Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the device and provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during device operation. 13.1 Installing Firmware Updates You can follow this procedure to update the device firmware. Prerequisites:
Make sure your device has Internet connection. Perform this procedure once a system update becomes available for your device. Make sure the battery level is at least 50%. NOTICE:
To avoid high mobile data charges, connect your device to a Wi-Fi network. Once a system update is available, a System Update Available notification appears on the Notifications panel. Procedure:
1 From the Notifications panel, tap System Update Available. 2 Select Download. 3 In the Update new SW window, tap Download. When the download completes, the System Update Downloaded notification appears on the Notifications panel. 4 From the Notifications panel, tap System Update Downloaded and select Install. 5 In the Update new SW window, select Restart and install. 13.2 Maintaining LEX Device For trouble-free service, observe the following tips when using the LEX device:
Do not scratch or use a pen or a pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the screen. The touch-sensitive screen is made of polycarbonate. Do not to drop or subject the device to strong impact. Protect from extreme temperatures. Do not leave device on the dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heat sources. Do not store in any location that is dusty, damp, or wet. Use a soft lens cloth to clean the device. If the surface of the screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol. Periodically replace the rechargeable battery to ensure maximum battery life and product performance. Battery life depends on individual usage patterns. 107 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13.3 Battery Safety Guidelines Adhere to the following guidelines for battery safety:
The area where the units are charged should be clear of debris and combustible materials or chemicals. Follow battery usage, storage, and charging guidelines found in this guide. To charge the battery, the battery and charger temperatures must be between +32 F and +113 F Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard.
(0 C and +45 C) Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Use of an incompatible battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If you have any questions about the compatibility of a battery or a charger, contact Motorola Solution support. If charging through a USB port, the device shall only be connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the USB-IF compliance program. To enable authentication of an approved battery, as required by IEEE1725 clause 10.2.1, all batteries will carry a Motorola hologram. Do not fit any battery without checking it has the Motorola authentication hologram. Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture, or shred. Severe impact from dropping any battery-operated device on a hard surface could cause the battery to overheat. Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, or expose to fire, explosion, or other hazard. Do not leave or store the equipment in or near areas that might get very hot, such as in a parked vehicle or near a radiator or other heat source. Do not place battery into a microwave oven or dryer. Battery usage by children should be supervised. Follow local regulations to properly dispose of used rechargeable batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area with large amounts of water and seek medical advice. If you suspect damage to your equipment or battery, contact Motorola Solutions support to arrange for inspection. 13.4 Cleaning Guidelines This section includes cleaning guidelines for the LEX device. WARNING: Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the device and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines. CAUTION:
Always wear eye protection. Read the warning labels on compressed air and alcohol products before use. If you have to use any other solution for medical reasons, contact Motorola Solutions for more information. 108 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Approved Cleanser Active Ingredients 100% of the active ingredients in any cleaner must consist of one or a combination of the following:
isopropyl alcohol, or mild dish soap. Cleaning Instructions Do not apply liquids directly to the device. Dampen a soft cloth or use pre-moistened wipes. Do not wrap the device in the cloth or wipe, but gently wipe the unit Harmful Ingredients Many vinyl gloves contain phthalate additives, which are often not recommended for medical use and are known to be harmful to the housing of the device. The device should not be handled while wearing vinyl gloves containing phthalates, or before hands are washed to remove contaminant residue after gloves are removed. If products containing the harmful ingredients are used before handling the device, such as hand sanitizers containing ethanolamine, hands must be completely dry before handling the device to prevent damage to the plastics. Cleaning Materials Required Alcohol wipes Lens tissue Cotton-tipped applicators Can of compressed air with a tube Isopropyl alcohol Cleaning Frequency The cleaning frequency is up to your discretion due to the varied environments in which the mobile devices are used. They may be cleaned as frequently as required, but it is advisable to clean the camera window periodically when used in dirty environments to ensure optimum performance. 13.5 Cleaning LEX Device This section includes instructions on how the LEX device should be cleaned. Housing Using the alcohol wipes, wipe the housing including buttons. Display The display can be wiped down with the alcohol wipes, but care should be taken not to allow any pooling of liquid around the edges of the display. Immediately dry the display with a soft, non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking. Camera Window Wipe the camera window periodically with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses. 109 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13.6 Cleaning Interface Connector When and where to use: Use this procedure to clean the contacts of the interface connector on LEX device. Procedure:
1 Power off the device. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator along the contacts of the interface connector. Slowly move the applicator back-and-forth from one side of the connector to the other. 4 If grease and other dirt can be found on other areas of the cradle, remove using a lint-free cloth and alcohol. 5 Allow few minutes (depending on ambient temperature and humidity) for the alcohol to air dry before powering on the device. 13.7 Cleaning Battery Contacts When and where to use: Perform this procedure to clean the battery connectors. Procedure:
1 Remove the main battery from device. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Gently, rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the contacts. Do not leave any cotton residue on the contacts. 4 Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the contacts area. 5 Use a dry cotton-tipped applicator and repeat steps 4 and 5 at least three times. CAUTION: Do not point nozzle at yourself and others. Ensure that the nozzle or tube is away from your face. 6 Spray compressed air on the connector area by pointing the tube/nozzle about inch away from the surface. 7 Inspect the area for any grease or dirt, repeat if required. 13.8 Troubleshooting This section lists common problems and solutions to fix the problems. Table 21: Troubleshooting the LEX Series Device Solution Problem After pressing the Re-charge or replace the battery. Power button, does not turn on. Cause Battery is completely discharged. 110 Problem After pressing the Power button, the device does not turn on but a charge battery icon Appears. After connecting the device to a Ca-
ble, a battery charging icon Ap-
pears. When charging, the LED slowly blinks red. Battery did not charge. During data com-
munication with a host computer, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. Cause Battery not installed properly. Power button not held down long enough. Device not responding. Battery charge level is very low. Battery is de-
pleted but is charging. The device is at an ex-
tremely low-
power state. Battery failed. Device was removed from power while battery was charg-
ing. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Device re-
moved from USB cable or disconnected from host computer during com-
munication. Incorrect ca-
ble configura-
tion. MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Solution Install the battery properly. See Installing the Battery on page 29. Press the Power button until the Motorola Solutions splash screen is displayed. Reset the device. Re-charge or replace the battery. Press and hold the Power button to turn on. Charge the device for a few minutes. The LED changes to flashing green then press the Power button to turn on the device. If LED continuously blinks red, check power con-
nections. Disconnect and reconnect connections. Replace battery. If the device still does not operate, per-
form a hardware reset. Attach the device to in-box charger with in-box cable. The LEX device typically charges the standard battery up to 90% in about 1.5h in room temperature. NOTICE: Charge times vary by ambient temper-
ature. You can achieve better charging time by using the quick charger. Battery does not charge if ambient temperature is below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Reattach the communication cable and re-transmit. Contact technical support. 111 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem During data com-
munication over Wi-
Fi, no data trans-
mitted, or transmit-
ted data was in-
complete. During data com-
munication over Bluetooth, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. During data com-
munication over Public / Private, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. No sound. Device turns off. A message ap-
pears stating not enough storage memory. Device cannot find any Bluetooth devi-
ces nearby. 112 Cause Wi-Fi radio is not on. You moved out of range of an access point. Bluetooth ra-
dio is not on. You moved out of range of another Bluetooth de-
vice. You are in an area of poor cellular serv-
ice. VPN is not set up cor-
rectly. SIM card not installed properly. Data plan not activated. Volume set-
ting is low or turned off. Device is in-
active. Battery is de-
pleted. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Too many applications installed on the device. Too far from other Blue-
tooth devi-
ces. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) near-
Solution Turn on the Wi-Fi radio. Move closer to an access point. Turn on the Bluetooth radio. Move without 10 m (32.8 ft.) of the other device. Move into an area that has better service. Contact technical support for VPN setup information. Remove and re-install the SIM cards. Contact your service provider and ensure that your data plan is enabled. Adjust the volume. The display turns off after a period of inactivity. Set this pe-
riod to 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 minutes. Recharge or replace the battery. Move device to an area where the ambient temperature is between 0 C (32 F) and 45 C (113 F). Remove user-installed applications on the device to recov-
er memory. Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign, and tap and tap Uninstall. Move closer to the other Bluetooth device(s), within a range of 10 meters (32.8 feet). Apps. Select the unused programs Turn on the Bluetooth device(s) to find. MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Solution Set the Bluetooth device(s) to discoverable mode. If need-
ed, refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device (accesso-
ry) user manual. Clean the device screen with a piece of cloth, paying spe-
cial attention to the proximity sensor area. For more infor-
mation on cleaning the LEX display, see Cleaning LEX De-
vice on page 109. To check the exact location of the prox-
imity sensor on the LEX device, see Device Overview on page 24. Switch back to using the SIM card that allowed you to use the application. For more information, contact your network service provider. Problem The screen does not turn off when you hold the device close to your face during a call. An application does not work, even though it did before you switched the SIM cards. Cause by are not turned on. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) are not in discov-
erable mode. Dirty device screen im-
pairs the proximity sensor read-
ing. The settings of your cur-
rent SIM card do not allow to use the application. Table 22: For LEX Devices with Dual SIMs (Private Network and Public Network) Problem When the LEX device is in pri-
vate mode:
Calls and messages fail to phone numbers in a public network, or Cause Interconnection is not imple-
mented between private net-
work and public network. Calls and messages are not received from phone numbers in a public net-
work. When the LEX device is in pri-
vate mode:
Calls and messages are not received from phone numbers in a public net-
work. The caller might be using the public network phone number for the LEX. Solution If there is no connection be-
tween private network and public network in your system, then the LEX needs to be in public mode to call and an-
swer calls from a public net-
work. NOTICE: Emergen-
cy calling is availa-
ble when the LEX is in private mode, based on emergen-
cy settings in the pri-
vate SIM card. If there is no connection be-
tween private network and public network in your system, the LEX needs to be in public mode to answer calls to your public network number and to check voice mails for your public network phone number. If you prefer to keep the LEX in private mode, then you have the option of providing your private network phone number 113 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem Cause When the LEX device is in pri-
vate mode:
Messages and voice mails to your private network phone number are not re-
ceived. When the LEX device is in public mode:
Calls and messages fail to phone numbers in the pri-
vate network, or Calls and messages are not received from phone numbers in the private net-
work. When the LEX device is in public mode:
Calls and messages are not received from phone numbers in the private net-
work. SMS and voicemail are not im-
plemented in your private net-
work. Interconnection is not imple-
mented between private net-
work and public network. The caller might be using the private network phone number for the LEX. Solution to the caller, if allowed by your organization's policies. If SMS messages and voice-
mail are only available on the public network, callers must use your public network phone number to leave messages and voice mails. Also, the LEX must be in private mode to ac-
cess those messages and voice mails. If there is no connection be-
tween private network and public network in your system, then the LEX must be in pri-
vate mode to call, and to an-
swer calls from, the private network. If there is no connection be-
tween private network and public network in your system, the LEX must be in private mode to answer calls and messages to your private net-
work number and, if voice mail is enabled, to check voice mails for your private network phone number. If you prefer to keep the LEX in public mode, you have the option of provid-
ing your public network phone number to the caller. 13.9 Backing up Contacts with Android To back up contacts, the contacts must be exported to a .vcf file which must be copied to a secure location. Procedure:
. 1 On the Apps screen, tap 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen. 3 Select Settings. 4 Select Export. 5 Tap the triple-bar menu and select the location where you want to export the file with contacts. 114 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 6 In the text box, personalize the .vcf file name and tap 7 Tap SAVE. Postrequisites: Complete the contacts backup by following steps in Backing Up LEX Data Manually on page 115. 13.10 Backing Up LEX Data Manually Prerequisites: Make sure you have a USB type C cable to connect the device to a computer. Procedure:
1 Connect the device to a computer by using the supplied USB-C cable. The first time you connect the LEX device to a computer, device driver software is installed on the computer. When the Your device is ready to use message appears, you can proceed with the backup process. 2 From the Notifications panel on the device, tap the USB for... notification. 3 Tap Transfer files. 4 On the computer, click Start and select Computer. 5 Select the LEX L11 Portable Device. 6 Double-click Internal Shared Storage. 7 Navigate to the files that you want to back up. 8 Copy the files/folders to a secure location on your computer. 13.11 Syncing Data with Google Procedure:
1 Swipe the home screen up from the arrow sign. 2 On the Apps screen, select Settings 3 Select Accounts. 4 Under the Accounts section, select the preferred email account. 5 Select the checkbox next to the application to be synced. If you want your data to be synced automatically, you can tap to the Auto-sync data option. and select the check box next 13.12 Backing Up Your Data and Settings with Android Backup Service You can use the Android Backup Service to back up data connected to one or more of your Google Accounts. If you had to replace your device or erase its data, you can restore your data using any account that you backed up. The following data and settings are backed up with the Android Backup Service:
Google Calendar settings 115 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Wi-Fi networks and passwords Home screen wallpapers Gmail settings Applications installed through Google Play (backed up on the Play Store application) Display settings (Brightness and Sleep) Language and Input settings Date and Time Third-party application settings and data (varies by application) Procedure:
1 On the Apps screen, tap 2 Tap Backup & reset. 3 Tap Back up my data and adjust the slider to the ON position. 13.13 Restoring Contact Data You can restore the backed-up information to your device. NOTICE: For restoring other user data, see Accessing Files from a Computer on page 42. Procedure:
. 1 On the Apps screen, tap 2 Tap the triple-bar menu in the upper-left corner of the screen. 3 Select Settings. 4 Select Import. 5 In the Import contacts from pop-up window, tap .vcf file. 6 In the folder that opens, select the .vcf file with contacts. 13.14 Restoring Your Data and Settings You can choose to restore application settings when you reinstall an application on your device. This feature requires you to back up your data with your Google Account and that the application also uses the Android Backup Service. Some apps may not back up and restore all data. Procedure:
1 From the Apps screen, tap Settings. 2 Select Backup & reset. 3 Set the slidebar next to Automatic restore to the ON position. If you cannot modify the position of the slidebar, you must enable backing up data with Android backup service first. See Backing Up Your Data and Settings with Android Backup Service on page 115. 116 MN005019A01-B Chapter 13: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13.15 Resetting the LEX Device You can use this procedure to reset the LEX device if it does not operate properly. Procedure:
1 Power off and on the device and verify if the problem is gone. The device restarts. If the problem remains, perform step 2. CAUTION: To avoid erasing important data from your device, do not press any of the buttons during power up. 2 Press the Power button and hold it for 10 seconds. The device restarts. 3 Remove the battery, reinsert it, and verify if the problem is gone. The device restarts. If the problem remains, contact technical support. 117 MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Appendix A Technical Specifications NOTICE: The specifications are subject to change. Table 23: Technical Specifications Item Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Durability Display Physical keys Operating temperature Storage temperature Hardware Processor Chipset Memory 118 Specification With standard battery: 152.5 x 78 x 13.2 mm
(6 x 3 x 0.5 in) With extended battery: 152.5 x 78 x 18.9 mm
(6 x 3 x 0.7 in) With standard battery: 260 g (9.8 oz) With extended battery: 310 g (10.9 Oz) Continues to work after multiple drops on ev-
ery face/edge/corner onto smooth concrete from a height of 120 cm (48 in). Screen size and pixels: 5 in (720 x 1280) Brightness: 500 nits Touch: capacitive touchpannel supporting multi-touch, latex glove Volume up and volume down button PTT button Emergency button Group rocker control (up/down) Power (on/off) button Two programmable buttons
-20C to +55C (-4F to 131F)
-46C to +85C (-50F to 185F) 2 x 4-core Qualcomm Kryo 260 CPU (1.82.2 GHz) Qualcomm Snapdragon 660 4 GB LPDDR4 SDRAM 64 GB eMMC Item Camera Flash Sensors Ports Battery Microphone Software Operating System Messaging Web Wide Area Networks Standards LTE release LTE bands MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Specification Rear 13MP Camera with Auto Focus Front 8MP Camera with Fixed Focus Rear camera LED Flash with torchlight func-
tionality Ambient Light Sensor Fingerprint Sensor Barometric Pressure Sensor Proximity/Gesture Sensor Accelerometer Sensor Magnetometer Sensor Gyro 3.5 mm Audio Jack (stereo) Two nano SIM slots One microSD slot (microSD, microSDHC, mi-
croSDXC, with capacity up to 400 GB) USB Type-C Standard 2500 mAh (nominal voltage of 3.7V) High capacity 5000 mAh (nominal voltage of 3.7V) Three microphones (primary, secondary, and tertiary) with noise and echo cancellation. Android Nougat 7.1 Google, Google Play, Android, and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc. SMS/MMS E-mail HTML5/WAP 2.0 compliant AOSP WebKit browser, Chrome browser FDD-LTE/TDD-LTE/GSM/UMTS/HSPA+
Includes LTE 3GPP Release 11 features, Category 9 Capable Europe, the Middle East and Africa (EMEA) LEX L11e: 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 38, 39, 40, including FDD-TDD mobility Asia-Pacific, Latin America (APAC-LA) LEX L11a: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 28 119 MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Item Specification NOTICE: Bands 2 and 4 are speci-
fied as roaming for the US. North America (NA), US AT&T/Firstnet LEX L11n: 2, 4, 5, 7, 12, 14, 29, 30, 66 2CA DL 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz UMTS/HSPA+: 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz IEEE Std 802.11-2012 a/b/g/n/ac/k/r with hot-
spot functionality (up to 32 connections) BT 4.2 LE (Low Energy) + BR/EDR Profiles:
Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Hands Free Profile (HFP) Headset Profile (HSP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Serial Port Profile (SPP) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Service Discovery Application Profile (SDAP) Dial-up Networking Profile (DUN) Generic Object Exchange Profile (GOEP) Object Push Profile (OPP) Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile
(GAVDP) Message Access Profile (MAP) Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) File Transfer Profile (FTP) Personal Area Networking Profile (PAN) Proximity Profile (PXP) Health Device Profile (HDP) SIM Access Profile (SAP) Generic Attribute (GATT) and attribute proto-
col (ATT) Supports the following NFC modes of opera-
tion:
Reader/Writer mode Peer-to-Peer mode Card Emulation mode UICC SE is supported for card emulation mode. GSM bands 3G/3.5G bands Wi-Fi Operating band Standards Personal Area Networks Bluetooth NFC 120 MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Item GPS Location services Device Management Remote management and configuration Video and Imaging Supported formats Specification Standalone GPS Assisted GPS (aGPS) GLONASS Supports AirWatch DM MPEG-4 (.mp4) JPG PNG GIF BMP H.264 H.263 NOTICE: Video and images are time stamped for evidence documentation. Audio Supported formats Output Input Accessories MP3 (.mp3) AMR AMR-NB AMR-WB AAC/AAC+/eAAC LPCM Dual Front Facing Speakers up to 1.6W 3.5 mm 4 pole Audio Jack (stereo) connector supporting:
COTS 3.5 mm Headset COTS 3.5 mm Headset with Microphone COTS 3.5 Headset with Microphone and Send/End button Motorola Solutions 3.5 mm Mono Headset with Microphone and PTT button Bluetooth power Class 2 output power 2.5 mW (4 dBm) Bluetooth Power Class 1.5 output power 10mW (10dBm) BLE 4&5 - output power 1mW (0dBm) Three noise and echo cancelling micro-
phones 121 MN005019A01-B Appendix A: Technical Specifications Item In-box accessories Specification Either standard battery or high capacity bat-
tery with the appropriate battery cover USB-A to USB-C data/power cable Region-specific wall charger Quick Start Guide Regulatory/Safety Guide 122
various | C2PC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 28.67 KiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 |
FCC ID: AZ489FT7104 Date: May 13, 2021 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Class 2 Permissive Change to FCC Authorized Transceiver with FCC ID:
AZ489FT7104 Dear Sir/Madam, A permissive change is requested for the subject transceiver which is marketed in the United States and elsewhere. A. DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT CHANGES:
The RF Filters and switch listed below are replacement drop in part due to end of life (EOL) and are pin-to-pin compatible and there is no layout changes involved in the schematic. Old Motorola P/N New Motorola P/N New MFG P/N Old MFG P/N Description (Bands) HZ000617A01 HZ001066A01 B39222B8932P810 ACFM-7045-TR1 Quadplexer for B25/ B66
(FL5603) HZ000452A01 HZ000995A01 SAFRC2G59MC0F0A ACPF7241 Filter for B41 (FL6202) HZ000469A01 HZ001469A01 QM12648TR13-10K RF1648B RF Switch for B2 diversity
(U5901, U6102, U5800) Other miscellaneous changes components involve Rear Camera, Front Camera, PCB new material and Memory change as per the following table. Old Motorola P/N New Motorola P/N Description IM000032A01 IM000032A02 Rear Camera IM000031A02 IM000031A03 Front Camera PC002292A01 PC002292A02 PCB Material MM000458A01 MM000490A01 Memory same vendor Micon (no clock change) ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13A FCC ID: AZ489FT7104 B. PERFORMANCE DIFFERENCES:
EMC Part 15B has been assessed and no degradation found. Degradation was observed on EME as compared to the previous filing but the data continues to be compliant to the FCC limits including HAC. There is no impact to BT/WIFI performance due to no changes were involved on these sections. This radio continues to meet all FCC emissions requirements for which authorization was granted. However, the EME has degraded compared to those originally reported, thus this change does meet requirements of a Class-2 Permissive Change. C. CONCLUSION:
Sincerely, _____________ Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail : deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13A
various | Certification Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 198.44 KiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 |
Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ489FT7104/ IC: 109U-89FT7104 EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification
(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100 Sec 4) 2.1 Statement of Certification Transceiver type described herein (AZ489FT7104/109U-89FT7104) is in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules and ISED RSS standards. Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME: Gaby Bittion SIGNATURE:
DATE: April 18, 2021 TITLE: RF Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ489FT7104/ IC: 109U-89FT7104 2.2 Attestation Statement (Equipment Class DTS and DSS Bluetooth/WiFi) This device contains an embedded Bluetooth device and WiFi device that are compliant with the applicable FCC Part 15C and ISED RSS 247 regulations. Part 15.247 (a)(1) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The hopping sequence must be pseudo random. Each frequency must be used equally on the average by each transmitter The receivers input bandwidth is approximately equal to the transmit bandwidth The receiver hops in sequence with the transmitted signal Part 15.247 (g) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system is designed to comply with all of the regulations in this section when the transmitter is presented with a continuous data (or information) Part 15.247(h) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system does not coordinate its channel selection/hopping sequence with other frequency hopping systems for the express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping frequencies by multiple transmitters. NAME: Gaby Bitton SIGNATURE:
DATE: April 18, 2021 TITLE: RF Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 2 OF 2
various | RF Exp PC2 App B probe cal pt 1 of 3 | RF Exposure Info | 3.80 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 |
various | RF Exp PC2 App B probe cal pt 2 of 3 | RF Exposure Info | 4.04 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 |
various | RF Exp PC2 App B probe cal pt 3 of 3 | RF Exposure Info | 4.08 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 |
various | RF Exp PC2 App C Dipole cal pt 1 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 4.81 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 |
various | RF Exp PC2 App C Dipole cal pt 2 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 2.66 MiB | May 13 2021 / May 14 2021 |
various | External Photos | External Photos | 2.76 MiB | April 06 2018 |
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS OF EUT Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 1 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 2 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 3 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 4 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 5 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 6 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 7 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 8
various | Internal Photos Part 1 | Internal Photos | 3.64 MiB | April 06 2018 |
Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 9 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 10 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 11 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 12 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 13 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 14 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 15
various | Internal Photos Part 2 | Internal Photos | 3.51 MiB | April 06 2018 |
Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 16 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 17 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 18 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 19 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 20 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 21 Reference No.: 171127C13 Page 22
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2021-05-14 | 2510 ~ 2560 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2018-09-18 | 2510 ~ 2560 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
3 | 2018-06-18 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |
4 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
5 | 2510 ~ 2560 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||
6 | 2018-06-04 | 2510 ~ 2560 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Original Equipment |
7 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
8 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
9 | 13.56 ~ 13.56 | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | ||
10 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various | Effective |
2021-05-14
|
||||
various |
2018-09-18
|
|||||
various |
2018-06-18
|
|||||
various |
2018-06-04
|
|||||
various | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Motorola Solutions, Inc.
|
||||
various | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003778479
|
||||
various | Physical Address |
8000 West Sunrise Blvd
|
||||
various |
Ft Lauderdale, FL
|
|||||
various |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
various | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
various |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
various |
t******@us.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
various | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
various |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
various |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
various | Grantee Code |
AZ4
|
||||
various | Equipment Product Code |
89FT7104
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
various | Name |
D**** Z********
|
||||
various | Title |
Regulatory Compliance Manager
|
||||
various | Telephone Number |
95472********
|
||||
various | Fax Number |
--********
|
||||
various |
d******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
various | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
various | Yes | |||||
various | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
various | Yes | |||||
various | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 12/15/2018 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
various | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
various | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
various | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
various | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
various | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | |||||
various | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
various | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | LEX L11 Mission Critical LTE Device | ||||
various | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
various | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
various | Original Equipment | |||||
various | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
various | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
various | Grant Comments | Output Power is EIRP and ERP for above and below 1 GHz, respectively, except for LTE Band 30 and Part 90 LTE Band 26 emissions, which are conducted. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific body-worn accessories, such as belt-clips and holsters, tested for this filing, or belt-clips and holsters that have no metallic components in the assembly and cause the device to operate with the minimum separation distance of 1.0-cm, as described in this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR for head, body-worn accessory, product specific (wireless router), simultaneous transmission and product specific (10g SAR) exposure conditions are 1.28 W/kg, 1.21 W/kg, 1.47 W/kg, 1.59 W/kg and 2.79 W/kg, respectively. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4, 25, and 66; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5 and 12; LTE of 5, and 10MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 13, 14, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26; and LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for TDD LTE Band 41. HAC Rating: M4 T3: 2011. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories; this filing is applicable only for U.S. operations. Class II Permissive Change: Changes RF Filters and Switch due to end-of-life for original parts. These are pin-to-pin compatible, and there is no layout changes were involved. | ||||
various | Output Power is EIRP and ERP for above and below 1 GHz, respectively, except for LTE Band 30 and Part 90 LTE Band 26 emissions, which are conducted. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific body-worn accessories, such as belt-clips and holsters, tested for this filing, or belt-clips and holsters that have no metallic components in the assembly and cause the device to operate with the minimum separation distance of 1.0-cm, as described in this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR for head, body-worn accessory, product specific (wireless router), and simultaneous transmission exposure conditions are 1.28 W/kg, 0.81 W/kg, 1.21 W/kg, and 1.59 W/kg, respectively. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4, 25, and 66; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5 and 12; LTE of 5, and 10MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 13, 14, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26; and LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for TDD LTE Band 41. HAC Rating: M4 T3: 2011. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories; this filing is applicable only for U.S. operations. Class II Permissive Change: Adding LTE Bands 13, 17,25, 26, and 41. | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. Device contains 20/40/80MHz bandwidth. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 10 mm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body-worn accessory, hotspot and simultaneous transmission is : 0.84 W/kg, 0.44 W/kg, 0.49 W/kg and 1.59 W/kg respectively. Class II Permissive Change: Add VOIP HAC. This device supports Over-the Top (OTT) which is voice services operating over IP by pre-installed application. | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. Device contains 20/40MHz bandwidth. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 10 mm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body-worn accessory, hotspot and simultaneous transmission is : 1.03 W/kg, 0.15 W/kg, 0.15 W/kg and 1.59 W/kg respectively. Class II Permissive Change: Add VOIP HAC. This device supports Over-the Top (OTT) which is voice services operating over IP by pre-installed application. | |||||
various | Output power listed is ERP/EIRP. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 10 mm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body-worn accessory, hotspot and simultaneous transmission is : 1.28 W/kg, 0.81 W/kg, 1.21 W/kg and 1.59 W/kg respectively. HAC rating is M4T3-2011. This device also contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. Class II Permissive Change: Add VOIP HAC. This device supports Over-the Top (OTT) which is voice services operating over IP by pre-installed application. | |||||
various | Output power listed is ERP/EIRP. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 10 mm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body-worn accessory, hotspot and simultaneous transmission is : 1.28 W/kg, 0.81 W/kg, 1.21 W/kg and 1.59 W/kg respectively. HAC rating is M4T3-2011. This device also contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. Device contains 20/40MHz bandwidth. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 10 mm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body-worn accessory, hotspot and simultaneous transmission is : 1.03 W/kg, 0.15 W/kg, 0.15 W/kg and 1.59 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. Device contains 20/40/80MHz bandwidth. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 10 mm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body-worn accessory, hotspot and simultaneous transmission is : 0.84 W/kg, 0.44 W/kg, 0.49 W/kg and 1.59 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. | |||||
various | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
various | Firm Name |
Motorola Penang Advanced Communication Laboratory
|
||||
various |
SPORTON International Inc.
|
|||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various | Name |
H**** H******
|
||||
various |
A******** C******
|
|||||
various |
K**** L******
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
604-2********
|
||||
various |
886-3******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
various | Fax Number |
604 6********
|
||||
various |
886-3********
|
|||||
various |
+886-********
|
|||||
various |
h******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
various |
a******@sporton.com.tw
|
|||||
various |
k******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H | HC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.44 | 0.020683 ppm | 254KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 22H | HC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.389 | 0.039178 ppm | 246KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 24E | HC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.475 | 0.020888 ppm | 248KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 24E | HC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.513 | 0.020888 ppm | 247KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 24E | HC | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.367 | 0.015024 ppm | 4M13G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 27 | HC | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.294 | 0.022662 ppm | 4M13G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 22H | HC | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.188 | 0.007756 ppm | 4M15G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.329 | 0.011996 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1908.5 | 0.328 | 0.008474 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1907.5 | 0.34 | 0.008474 ppm | 4M47G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 11 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.326 | 0.009285 ppm | 8M91G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 12 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.326 | 0.013831 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 13 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.335 | 0.008267 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 14 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.269 | 0.011996 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 15 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1908.5 | 0.283 | 0.012764 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 16 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1907.5 | 0.279 | 0.008474 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 17 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.281 | 0.009285 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 18 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.283 | 0.013831 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 19 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.279 | 0.008267 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.324 | 0.014743 ppm | 1M97G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 21 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.334 | 0.013733 ppm | 2M67G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 22 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1752.5 | 0.328 | 0.009273 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 23 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1750 | 0.33 | 0.008666 ppm | 8M95G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 24 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.348 | 0.014026 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 25 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.349 | 0.008681 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 26 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.268 | 0.014743 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 27 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.276 | 0.013733 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 28 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1752.5 | 0.277 | 0.009273 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 29 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1750 | 0.275 | 0.008666 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.287 | 0.014026 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 31 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.279 | 0.008681 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 32 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.145 | 0.025602 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 33 | 22H | HC | 825.5 | 847.5 | 0.15 | 0.017052 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 34 | 22H | HC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.145 | 0.014719 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 35 | 22H | HC | 829 | 844 | 0.151 | 0.006407 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 36 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.117 | 0.025602 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 37 | 22H | HC | 825.5 | 847.5 | 0.118 | 0.017052 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 38 | 22H | HC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.118 | 0.014719 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 39 | 22H | HC | 829 | 844 | 0.119 | 0.006407 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 27 | HC | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.242 | 0.005516 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 41 | 27 | HC | 2505 | 2565 | 0.241 | 0.006586 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 42 | 27 | HC | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.24 | 0.01113 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 43 | 27 | HC | 2510 | 2560 | 0.234 | 0.008734 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 44 | 27 | HC | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.197 | 0.005516 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 45 | 27 | HC | 2505 | 2565 | 0.194 | 0.006586 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 46 | 27 | HC | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.189 | 0.01113 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 47 | 27 | HC | 2510 | 2560 | 0.204 | 0.008734 ppm | 17M8D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 48 | 27 | HC | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.172 | 0.019872 ppm | 1M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 49 | 27 | HC | 700.5 | 714.5 | 0.174 | 0.01876 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 27 | HC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.173 | 0.010085 ppm | 4M47G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 51 | 27 | HC | 704 | 711 | 0.174 | 0.018166 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 52 | 27 | HC | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.143 | 0.019872 ppm | 1M08D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 53 | 27 | HC | 700.5 | 714.5 | 0.144 | 0.01876 ppm | 2M67D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 54 | 27 | HC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.010085 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 55 | 27 | HC | 704 | 711 | 0.143 | 0.018166 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 56 | 9 | HC PF | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.173 | 0.016256 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 57 | 9 | HC PF | 793 | 793 | 0.168 | 0.007432 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 58 | 9 | HC PF | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.145 | 0.016256 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 59 | 9 | HC PF | 793 | 793 | 0.136 | 0.007432 ppm | 8M91D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 27 | HC | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.232 | 0.012576 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 61 | 27 | HC | 2310 | 2310 | 0.216 | 0.011834 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 62 | 27 | HC | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.199 | 0.012576 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 63 | 27 | HC | 2310 | 2310 | 0.191 | 0.011834 ppm | 8M91D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 64 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.302 | 0.014865 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 65 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1778.5 | 0.312 | 0.011793 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 66 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1777.5 | 0.291 | 0.011251 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 67 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1775 | 0.309 | 0.009918 ppm | 8M91G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 68 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1772.5 | 0.294 | 0.012002 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 69 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1770 | 0.279 | 0.011185 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.238 | 0.014865 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 71 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1778.5 | 0.249 | 0.011793 ppm | 2M67D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 72 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1777.5 | 0.245 | 0.011251 ppm | 4M46D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 73 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1775 | 0.243 | 0.009918 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 74 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1772.5 | 0.244 | 0.012002 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 75 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1770 | 0.268 | 0.011185 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 76 | 27 | HC | 782 | 782 | 0.14 | 0.0023 ppm | 9M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 77 | 27 | HC | 782 | 782 | 0.1138 | 0.0023 ppm | 9M05D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 78 | 27 | HC | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.1396 | 0.0023 ppm | 4M50G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 79 | 27 | HC | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.1189 | 0.0023 ppm | 4M50D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 27 | HC | 709 | 711 | 0.1556 | 0.0089 ppm | 9M05G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 81 | 27 | HC | 709 | 711 | 0.1306 | 0.0089 ppm | 9M03D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 82 | 27 | HC | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.1552 | 0.0089 ppm | 4M51G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 83 | 27 | HC | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.1306 | 0.0089 ppm | 4M50D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 84 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1905 | 0.3365 | 0.0045 ppm | 18M6G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 85 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1905 | 0.2786 | 0.0045 ppm | 18M5D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 86 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1907.5 | 0.3304 | 0.0045 ppm | 13M5G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 87 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1907.5 | 0.2799 | 0.0045 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 88 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1910 | 0.3319 | 0.0045 ppm | 9M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 89 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1910 | 0.2805 | 0.0045 ppm | 9M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1912.5 | 0.3334 | 0.0045 ppm | 4M50G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 91 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1912.5 | 0.2812 | 0.0045 ppm | 4M50D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 92 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1913.5 | 0.3319 | 0.0045 ppm | 2M73G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 93 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1913.5 | 0.2786 | 0.0045 ppm | 2M73D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 94 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.3266 | 0.0045 ppm | 1M10G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 95 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.2735 | 0.0045 ppm | 1M10D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 96 | 22H,9 | HC | 821.5 | 841.5 | 0.2382 | 0.0133 ppm | 13M5G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 97 | 22H,9 | HC | 821.5 | 841.5 | 0.1923 | 0.0133 ppm | 13M5D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 98 | 22H,9 | HC | 819 | 844 | 0.2328 | 0.0133 ppm | 9M09W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 99 | 22H,9 | HC | 819 | 844 | 0.1977 | 0.0133 ppm | 9M03D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H,9 | HC | 816.5 | 846.5 | 0.2312 | 0.0133 ppm | 4M51G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 101 | 22H,9 | HC | 816.5 | 846.5 | 0.1919 | 0.0133 ppm | 4M51D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 102 | 22H,9 | HC | 815.5 | 847.5 | 0.2344 | 0.0133 ppm | 2M73G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 103 | 22H,9 | HC | 815.5 | 847.5 | 0.1963 | 0.0133 ppm | 2M74D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 104 | 22H,9 | HC | 814.7 | 848.3 | 0.2203 | 0.0133 ppm | 1M10G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 105 | 22H,9 | HC | 814.7 | 848.3 | 0.1832 | 0.0133 ppm | 1M10D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 106 | 27 | HC | 2506 | 2680 | 0.2992 | 0.0051 ppm | 18M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 107 | 27 | HC | 2506 | 2680 | 0.2495 | 0.0051 ppm | 18M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 108 | 27 | HC | 2503.5 | 2682.5 | 0.3041 | 0.0051 ppm | 13M5G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 109 | 27 | HC | 2503.5 | 2682.5 | 0.2512 | 0.0051 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 11 | 27 | HC | 2501 | 2685 | 0.3048 | 0.0051 ppm | 9M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 111 | 27 | HC | 2501 | 2685 | 0.2449 | 0.0051 ppm | 9M03D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 112 | 27 | HC | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.3041 | 0.0051 ppm | 4M53G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 113 | 27 | HC | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.2438 | 0.0051 ppm | 4M52D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 22H | HC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.44 | 0.020683 ppm | 245KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 22H | HC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.389 | 0.039178 ppm | 246KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 24E | HC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.475 | 0.015925 ppm | 248KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 24E | HC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.513 | 0.020888 ppm | 247KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 24E | HC | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.367 | 0.015024 ppm | 4M13G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 27 | HC | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.294 | 0.022662 ppm | 4M13G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 7 | 22H | HC | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.188 | 0.007756 ppm | 4M15G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 8 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.329 | 0.011996 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 9 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1908.5 | 0.328 | 0.012764 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1907.5 | 0.34 | 0.008474 ppm | 4M47G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 11 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.326 | 0.009285 ppm | 8M91G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 12 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.326 | 0.013831 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 13 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.335 | 0.008267 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 14 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.269 | 0.011996 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 15 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1908.5 | 0.283 | 0.012764 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 16 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1907.5 | 0.279 | 0.008474 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 17 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.281 | 0.009285 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 18 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.283 | 0.013831 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 19 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.279 | 0.008267 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.324 | 0.014743 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 21 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.334 | 0.013733 ppm | 2M67G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 22 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1752.5 | 0.328 | 0.009273 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 23 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1750 | 0.33 | 0.008666 ppm | 8M95G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 24 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.348 | 0.014026 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 25 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.349 | 0.008681 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 26 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.268 | 0.014743 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 27 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.276 | 0.013733 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 28 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1752.5 | 0.277 | 0.009273 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 29 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1750 | 0.275 | 0.008666 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.287 | 0.014026 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 31 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.279 | 0.008681 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 32 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.145 | 0.025602 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 33 | 22H | HC | 825.5 | 847.5 | 0.15 | 0.017052 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 34 | 22H | HC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.145 | 0.014719 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 35 | 22H | HC | 829 | 844 | 0.151 | 0.006407 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 36 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.117 | 0.025602 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 37 | 22H | HC | 825.5 | 847.5 | 0.118 | 0.017052 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 38 | 22H | HC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.118 | 0.014719 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 39 | 22H | HC | 829 | 844 | 0.119 | 0.006407 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 27 | HC | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.242 | 0.005516 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 41 | 27 | HC | 2505 | 2565 | 0.241 | 0.006586 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 42 | 27 | HC | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.24 | 0.01113 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 43 | 27 | HC | 2510 | 2560 | 0.234 | 0.008734 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 44 | 27 | HC | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.197 | 0.005516 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 45 | 27 | HC | 2505 | 2565 | 0.194 | 0.006586 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 46 | 27 | HC | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.189 | 0.1113 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 47 | 27 | HC | 2510 | 2560 | 0.204 | 0.008734 ppm | 17M8D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 48 | 27 | HC | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.172 | 0.019872 ppm | 1M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 49 | 27 | HC | 700.5 | 714.5 | 0.174 | 0.01876 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 27 | HC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.173 | 0.010085 ppm | 4M47G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 51 | 27 | HC | 704 | 711 | 0.174 | 0.018166 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 52 | 27 | HC | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.143 | 0.019872 ppm | 1M08D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 53 | 27 | HC | 700.5 | 714.5 | 0.144 | 0.01876 ppm | 2M67D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 54 | 27 | HC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.010085 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 55 | 27 | HC | 704 | 711 | 0.143 | 0.018166 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 56 | 9 | HC PF | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.173 | 0.016256 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 57 | 9 | HC PF | 793 | 793 | 0.168 | 0.007432 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 58 | 9 | HC PF | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.145 | 0.016256 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 59 | 9 | HC PF | 793 | 793 | 0.136 | 0.007432 ppm | 8M91D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 27 | HC | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.232 | 0.012576 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 61 | 27 | HC | 2310 | 2310 | 0.216 | 0.011834 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 62 | 27 | HC | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.199 | 0.012576 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 63 | 27 | HC | 2310 | 2310 | 0.191 | 0.011834 ppm | 8M91D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 64 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.302 | 0.014865 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 65 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1778.5 | 0.312 | 0.011793 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 66 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1777.5 | 0.291 | 0.011251 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 67 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1775 | 0.309 | 0.009918 ppm | 8M91G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 68 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1772.5 | 0.294 | 0.012002 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 69 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1770 | 0.279 | 0.011185 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 7 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.238 | 0.014865 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 71 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1778.5 | 0.249 | 0.011793 ppm | 2M67D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 72 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1777.5 | 0.245 | 0.011251 ppm | 4M46D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 73 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1775 | 0.243 | 0.009918 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 74 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1772.5 | 0.244 | 0.012002 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 75 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1770 | 0.268 | 0.011185 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 76 | 27 | HC | 782 | 782 | 0.14 | 0.0023 ppm | 9M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 77 | 27 | HC | 782 | 782 | 0.1138 | 0.0023 ppm | 9M05D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 78 | 27 | HC | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.1396 | 0.0023 ppm | 4M50G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 79 | 27 | HC | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.1189 | 0.0023 ppm | 4M50D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 8 | 27 | HC | 709 | 711 | 0.1556 | 0.0089 ppm | 9M05G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 81 | 27 | HC | 709 | 711 | 0.1306 | 0.0089 ppm | 9M03D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 82 | 27 | HC | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.1552 | 0.0089 ppm | 4M51G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 83 | 27 | HC | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.1306 | 0.0089 ppm | 4M50D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 84 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1905 | 0.3365 | 0.0045 ppm | 18M6G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 85 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1905 | 0.2786 | 0.0045 ppm | 18M5D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 86 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1907.5 | 0.3304 | 0.0045 ppm | 13M5G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 87 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1907.5 | 0.2799 | 0.0045 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 88 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1910 | 0.3319 | 0.0045 ppm | 9M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 89 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1910 | 0.2805 | 0.0045 ppm | 9M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 9 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1912.5 | 0.3334 | 0.0045 ppm | 4M50G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 91 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1912.5 | 0.2812 | 0.0045 ppm | 4M50D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 92 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1913.5 | 0.3319 | 0.0045 ppm | 2M73G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 93 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1913.5 | 0.2786 | 0.0045 ppm | 2M73D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 94 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.3266 | 0.0045 ppm | 1M10G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 95 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1914.3 | 0.2735 | 0.0045 ppm | 1M10D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 96 | 22H,9 | HC | 821.5 | 841.5 | 0.2382 | 0.0133 ppm | 13M5G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 97 | 22H,9 | HC | 821.5 | 841.5 | 0.1923 | 0.0133 ppm | 13M5D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 98 | 22H,9 | HC | 819 | 844 | 0.2328 | 0.0133 ppm | 9M09W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 99 | 22H,9 | HC | 819 | 844 | 0.1977 | 0.0133 ppm | 9M03D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 22H,9 | HC | 816.5 | 846.5 | 0.2312 | 0.0133 ppm | 4M51G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 101 | 22H,9 | HC | 816.5 | 846.5 | 0.1919 | 0.0133 ppm | 4M51D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 102 | 22H,9 | HC | 815.5 | 847.5 | 0.2344 | 0.0133 ppm | 2M73G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 103 | 22H,9 | HC | 815.5 | 847.5 | 0.1963 | 0.0133 ppm | 2M74D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 104 | 22H,9 | HC | 814.7 | 848.3 | 0.2203 | 0.0133 ppm | 1M10G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 105 | 22H,9 | HC | 814.7 | 848.3 | 0.1832 | 0.0133 ppm | 1M10D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 106 | 27 | HC | 2506 | 2680 | 0.2992 | 0.0051 ppm | 18M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 107 | 27 | HC | 2506 | 2680 | 0.2495 | 0.0051 ppm | 18M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 108 | 27 | HC | 2503.5 | 2682.5 | 0.3041 | 0.0051 ppm | 13M5G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 109 | 27 | HC | 2503.5 | 2682.5 | 0.2512 | 0.0051 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 11 | 27 | HC | 2501 | 2685 | 0.3048 | 0.0051 ppm | 9M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 111 | 27 | HC | 2501 | 2685 | 0.2449 | 0.0051 ppm | 9M03D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 112 | 27 | HC | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.3041 | 0.0051 ppm | 4M53G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 113 | 27 | HC | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.2438 | 0.0051 ppm | 4M52D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15E | CC HC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15E | CC HC MO ND | 5260 | 5320 | 0.094 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 15E | CC HC MO ND | 5500 | 5720 | 0.11 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 15E | CC HC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.097 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.001 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15C | CC HC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.169 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 22H | HC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.44 | 0.020683 ppm | 245KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 22H | HC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.389 | 0.039178 ppm | 246KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 3 | 24E | HC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.475 | 0.015925 ppm | 248KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 4 | 24E | HC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.513 | 0.020888 ppm | 247KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 5 | 24E | HC | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.367 | 0.015024 ppm | 4M13G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 6 | 27 | HC | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.294 | 0.022662 ppm | 4M13G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 7 | 22H | HC | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.188 | 0.007756 ppm | 4M15G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 8 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.329 | 0.011996 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 9 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1908.5 | 0.328 | 0.012764 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1907.5 | 0.34 | 0.008474 ppm | 4M47G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 11 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.326 | 0.009285 ppm | 8M91G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 12 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.326 | 0.013831 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 13 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.335 | 0.008267 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 14 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.269 | 0.011996 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 15 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1908.5 | 0.283 | 0.012764 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 16 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1907.5 | 0.279 | 0.008474 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 17 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.281 | 0.009285 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 18 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.283 | 0.013831 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 19 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.279 | 0.008267 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.324 | 0.014743 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 21 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.334 | 0.013733 ppm | 2M67G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 22 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1752.5 | 0.328 | 0.009273 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 23 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1750 | 0.33 | 0.008666 ppm | 8M95G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 24 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.348 | 0.014026 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 25 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.349 | 0.008681 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 26 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.268 | 0.014743 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 27 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.276 | 0.013733 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 28 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1752.5 | 0.277 | 0.009273 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 29 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1750 | 0.275 | 0.008666 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 3 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.287 | 0.014026 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 31 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.279 | 0.008681 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 32 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.145 | 0.025602 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 33 | 22H | HC | 825.5 | 847.5 | 0.15 | 0.017052 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 34 | 22H | HC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.145 | 0.014719 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 35 | 22H | HC | 829 | 844 | 0.151 | 0.006407 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 36 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.117 | 0.025602 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 37 | 22H | HC | 825.5 | 847.5 | 0.118 | 0.017052 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 38 | 22H | HC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.118 | 0.014719 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 39 | 22H | HC | 829 | 844 | 0.119 | 0.006407 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 4 | 27 | HC | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.242 | 0.005516 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 41 | 27 | HC | 2505 | 2565 | 0.241 | 0.006586 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 42 | 27 | HC | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.24 | 0.01113 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 43 | 27 | HC | 2510 | 2560 | 0.234 | 0.008734 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 44 | 27 | HC | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.197 | 0.005516 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 45 | 27 | HC | 2505 | 2565 | 0.194 | 0.006586 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 46 | 27 | HC | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.189 | 0.1113 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 47 | 27 | HC | 2510 | 2560 | 0.204 | 0.008734 ppm | 17M8D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 48 | 27 | HC | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.172 | 0.019872 ppm | 1M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 49 | 27 | HC | 700.5 | 714.5 | 0.174 | 0.01876 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 5 | 27 | HC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.173 | 0.010085 ppm | 4M47G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 51 | 27 | HC | 704 | 711 | 0.174 | 0.018166 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 52 | 27 | HC | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.143 | 0.019872 ppm | 1M08D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 53 | 27 | HC | 700.5 | 714.5 | 0.144 | 0.01876 ppm | 2M67D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 54 | 27 | HC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.010085 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 55 | 27 | HC | 704 | 711 | 0.143 | 0.018166 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 56 | 9 | HC PF | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.173 | 0.016256 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 57 | 9 | HC PF | 793 | 793 | 0.168 | 0.007432 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 58 | 9 | HC PF | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.145 | 0.016256 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 59 | 9 | HC PF | 793 | 793 | 0.136 | 0.007432 ppm | 8M91D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 6 | 27 | HC | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.232 | 0.012576 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 61 | 27 | HC | 2310 | 2310 | 0.216 | 0.011834 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 62 | 27 | HC | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.199 | 0.012576 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 63 | 27 | HC | 2310 | 2310 | 0.191 | 0.011834 ppm | 8M91D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 64 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.302 | 0.014865 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 65 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1778.5 | 0.312 | 0.011793 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 66 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1777.5 | 0.291 | 0.011251 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 67 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1775 | 0.309 | 0.009918 ppm | 8M91G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 68 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1772.5 | 0.294 | 0.012002 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 69 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1770 | 0.279 | 0.011185 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 7 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.238 | 0.014865 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 71 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1778.5 | 0.249 | 0.011793 ppm | 2M67D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 72 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1777.5 | 0.245 | 0.011251 ppm | 4M46D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 73 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1775 | 0.243 | 0.009918 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 74 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1772.5 | 0.244 | 0.012002 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 75 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1770 | 0.268 | 0.011185 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 22H | HC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.44 | 0.020683 ppm | 245KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.389 | 0.039178 ppm | 246KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 3 | 24E | HC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.475 | 0.015925 ppm | 248KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.513 | 0.020888 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 5 | 24E | HC | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.367 | 0.015024 ppm | 4M13G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 6 | 27 | HC | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.294 | 0.022662 ppm | 4M13G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 7 | 22H | HC | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.188 | 0.007756 ppm | 4M15G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 8 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.329 | 0.011996 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 9 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1908.5 | 0.328 | 0.012764 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1907.5 | 0.34 | 0.008474 ppm | 4M47G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 11 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.326 | 0.009285 ppm | 8M91G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 12 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.326 | 0.013831 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 13 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.335 | 0.008267 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 14 | 24E | HC | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.269 | 0.011996 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 15 | 24E | HC | 1851.5 | 1908.5 | 0.283 | 0.012764 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 16 | 24E | HC | 1852.5 | 1907.5 | 0.279 | 0.008474 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 17 | 24E | HC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.281 | 0.009285 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 18 | 24E | HC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.283 | 0.013831 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 19 | 24E | HC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.279 | 0.008267 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 2 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.324 | 0.014743 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 21 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.334 | 0.013733 ppm | 2M67G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 22 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1752.5 | 0.328 | 0.009273 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 23 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1750 | 0.33 | 0.008666 ppm | 8M95G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 24 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.348 | 0.014026 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 25 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.349 | 0.008681 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 26 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.268 | 0.014743 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 27 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.276 | 0.013733 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 28 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1752.5 | 0.277 | 0.009273 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 29 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1750 | 0.275 | 0.008666 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 3 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.287 | 0.014026 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 31 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.279 | 0.008681 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 32 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.145 | 0.025602 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 33 | 22H | HC | 825.5 | 847.5 | 0.15 | 0.017052 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 34 | 22H | HC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.145 | 0.014719 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 35 | 22H | HC | 829 | 844 | 0.151 | 0.006407 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 36 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.117 | 0.025602 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 37 | 22H | HC | 825.5 | 847.5 | 0.118 | 0.017052 ppm | 2M68D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 38 | 22H | HC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.118 | 0.014719 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 39 | 22H | HC | 829 | 844 | 0.119 | 0.006407 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 4 | 27 | HC | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.242 | 0.005516 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 41 | 27 | HC | 2505 | 2565 | 0.241 | 0.006586 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 42 | 27 | HC | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.24 | 0.01113 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 43 | 27 | HC | 2510 | 2560 | 0.234 | 0.008734 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 44 | 27 | HC | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.197 | 0.005516 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 45 | 27 | HC | 2505 | 2565 | 0.194 | 0.006586 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 46 | 27 | HC | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.189 | 0.01113 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 47 | 27 | HC | 2510 | 2560 | 0.204 | 0.008734 ppm | 17M8D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 48 | 27 | HC | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.172 | 0.019872 ppm | 1M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 49 | 27 | HC | 700.5 | 714.5 | 0.174 | 0.01876 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 5 | 27 | HC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.173 | 0.010085 ppm | 4M47G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 51 | 27 | HC | 704 | 711 | 0.174 | 0.018166 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 52 | 27 | HC | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.143 | 0.019872 ppm | 1M08D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 53 | 27 | HC | 700.5 | 714.5 | 0.144 | 0.01876 ppm | 2M67D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 54 | 27 | HC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.010085 ppm | 4M47D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 55 | 27 | HC | 704 | 711 | 0.143 | 0.018166 ppm | 8M95D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 56 | 9 | HC PF | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.173 | 0.016256 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 57 | 9 | HC PF | 793 | 793 | 0.168 | 0.007432 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 58 | 9 | HC PF | 790.5 | 795.5 | 0.145 | 0.016256 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 59 | 9 | HC PF | 793 | 793 | 0.136 | 0.007432 ppm | 8M91D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 6 | 27 | HC | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.232 | 0.012576 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 61 | 27 | HC | 2310 | 2310 | 0.216 | 0.011834 ppm | 8M93G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 62 | 27 | HC | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.199 | 0.012576 ppm | 4M48D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 63 | 27 | HC | 2310 | 2310 | 0.191 | 0.011834 ppm | 8M91D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 64 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.302 | 0.014865 ppm | 1M07G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 65 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1778.5 | 0.312 | 0.011793 ppm | 2M68G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 66 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1777.5 | 0.291 | 0.011251 ppm | 4M48G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 67 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1775 | 0.309 | 0.009918 ppm | 8M91G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 68 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1772.5 | 0.294 | 0.012002 ppm | 13M4G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 69 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1770 | 0.279 | 0.011185 ppm | 17M9G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 7 | 27 | HC | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.238 | 0.014865 ppm | 1M07D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 71 | 27 | HC | 1711.5 | 1778.5 | 0.249 | 0.011793 ppm | 2M67D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 72 | 27 | HC | 1712.5 | 1777.5 | 0.245 | 0.011251 ppm | 4M46D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 73 | 27 | HC | 1715 | 1775 | 0.243 | 0.009918 ppm | 8M93D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 74 | 27 | HC | 1717.5 | 1772.5 | 0.244 | 0.012002 ppm | 13M4D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 75 | 27 | HC | 1720 | 1770 | 0.268 | 0.011185 ppm | 17M9D7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.001 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.169 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 2 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5260 | 5320 | 0.094 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 3 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5500 | 5720 | 0.11 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 4 | 15E | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.097 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 15C | CC | 13.56000000 | 13.56000000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0090000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC